Home

Roland RS-50 Musical Instrument User Manual

1. Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Orchestra 1 Orch Phr 1 Ac Brass 1 Brass Phr 1 Soft Lead 1 Soft Ld Phri Drums 1 Fill Phr 1 2 Orch Phr 2 2 Brass Phr 2 2 Soft Ld Phr2 2 Fill Phr 2 3 Orch Phr 3 3 Brass Phr 3 3 Soft Ld Phr3 3 Fill Phr 3 4 Orch Phr 4 4 Brass Phr 4 4 Soft Ld Phr4 4 Fill Phr 4 5 Orch Phr 5 5 MuteTp Phr 5 Soft Ld Phr5 5 Fill Phr 5 6 Orch Arp 1 6 TrombonePhr1 6 Soft Ld Arp1 6 SnrRol Phr 7 Orch Arp2 7 TrombonePhr2 7 Soft Ld Arp2 7 Tamb Phr 8 Orch Arp 3 8 Trumpet Phr1 8 Soft Ld Arp3 8 Conga Phr 9 Orch Arp 4 9 Trumpet Phr2 9 Soft Ld Arp4 9 Triangle Phr Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Hit amp Stab 1 Hit Phr 1 Synth 1 SynBrassPhr1 Techno 1 TekSyn Phr 1 Percus 1 Timpani Phr 2 Hit Phr 2 Brass 2 SynBrassPhr2 Synth 2 TekSyn Phr 2 sion 2 Timpani Roll 3 Hit Phr 3 3 SynBrassPhr3 3 TekSyn Phr 3 3 CastanetPhr 4 Hit Phr 4 4 SynBrassPhr4 4 TekSyn Phr 4 4 Taiko Phr 5 Hit Phr 5 5 SynBrassPh
2. No Name Voice No Name Voice No Name Voice No Name Voice No Name Voice 0351 St Orch Brs2 4 0421 Pan Flute 1 0491 TranceSaws 3 2 0561 RandomEnding 2 0631 Applause 2 0352 St Orch Brs3 4 0422 Bottle Blow1 2 0492 Power Stack 2 0562 Acid Copter 2 0632 Laughing 1 0353 Henry IV 4 0423 RS Sicu Pipe 0493 Alpha Rave T 0563 Etherality 4 0633 Screaming 1 0354 Brass 1 2 0424 RS Calliope 0494 Retro Rave 4 0564 Just Before 4 0634 Punch 1 0355 Brass 2 2 0425 Bottle Blow2 0495 Chrd Maj7 4 0565 Labo Feedbak 4 0635 Heart Beat 1 0356 Brite Brass 2 0426 Shakuhachi 1 0496 RndmFltrChrd 4 0566 Faveoravo 4 0636 Footsteps 1 0357 BigBand 2 0427 Shakuhachi 2 0497 Cool Beam 4 0567 Time Warp 3 0637 Gun Shot 1 0358 Octave Brass 2 0428 Nay 2 0498 Syn Calliope 2 0568 RS Wire Key 3 0638 Machine Gun 1 0359 RS Brass 1 4 0429 Tin Whistlel 0499 Chiffer Lead 2 0569 Echo Drops 1 0639 Lasergun 1 0360 RS Brass2 4 0430 Tin Whistle2 2 0500 Charang 2 0570 Echo Bell 2 0640 Explosion 2 0361 RS Brass 3 2 0431 ShakuBamboo 4 0501 Wire Lead 2 0571 Echo Pan 2 0362 RS Brass
3. No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2Patch Select Voice Key No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2Patch Select Voice Key gory MSB 87 MSB 121 Mode gory MSB 87 MSB 121 Mode LSB PC LSB PC LSB PC LSB PC 267 Ores SynStrings3 STR 67 109 1 51 2 SINGLE 327 Br21 StOrchBrs 3 BRS SSC Tee Ke 4 SINGLE 268 Or66 OrchestraHit HIT 67 117 0 56 2 SINGLE 328 Br22 Henry IV BRS 6 Tall 4 SINGLE 269 Or67 Bass Hit HT 67 us 1 56 2 SINGLE 329 Br23 Oct Brass BRS 6e Tel TI 2 SINGLE 270 Or68 6th Hit HIT 67 19 2 56 2 SINGLE 330 Br24 Power Saws SBR 6 Tel TI 3 DUAL 271 Or69 Euro Hit HT 67 120 3 56 2 SINGLE 331 Br25 RSSawBrs1 SBR esr seh 6 DUAL 272 Or70 Oboe WND 68 16 0 69 SINGLE 332 Br26 RSSawBrs2 SBR 6 781 6 DUAL 273 Or7i English Hom WND 68 17 0 70 SINGLE 333 Br27 RSOctSynBrs SBR 6 71l l 6 DUAL 274 Or72 Bassoon WND 68 18 0 71 SINGLE 334 Br28 Soft SynBrs SBR 6 3 TI 4 DUAL 275 Or73 Clarinet WND 68 19 0 72 SINGLE 335 Br29 DeepSynBrs SBR CT FE RETIRER 4 DUAL 276 Or74 Piccolo FLT 68 20 0 73 SINGLE 336 Br30 RS Velo Brs SBR 6 2
4. No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2Patch Select Voice Key No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2Patch Select Voice Key gory MSB 87 MSB 121 Mode gory MSB 87 MSB 121 Mode LSB PC LSB PC LSB PC LSB PC 33 Ky73 Chorus Or 2 ORG 67 42 18 3 SINGLE 200 Gt52 Gt FretNoise AGT 68 88 0 121 1 SINGLE 34 Ky74 Perc Organ ORG 67 43 2 18 2 SINGLE 201 Gt53 Gt Cut Noise AGT 68 89 1 121 1 SINGLE 35 Ky75 Organ 3 ORG 67 44 0 19 2 SINGLE 202 Gt54 String Slap AGT 68 90 2 121 1 SINGLE 36 Ky76 Church Org 1 ORG 67 45 0 20 1 SINGLE 37 Ky77 Church Org 2 ORG 67 46 20 2 SINGLE 38 Ky78 Church Org 3 ORG 67 47 2 20 2 SINGLE 4 ORCH 32 1K72 cae SS qr aerei cond fae No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2PatchSelect Voice Key 40 Ky80 Puff Organ ORG 67 49 21 2 SINGLE m MSB 87 SEET Mode 41 Ky81 Accordion Fr ACD 67 50 0 22 2 SINGLE LSB PC LSB PC 42 Ky82 Accordion It ACD 67 51 22 2 SINGLE XS Omi Eum Gg M is B i BOSE 43 Ky83 Harmonica HRM 67 52 0 23 1 SINGLE o ORE PRS She gt STR a 5 i DUAL 44 Ky84 Bandoneon ACD 67 53 24 2 SINGLE 25 ONG TRS Stings 3 STR e E 1 DUAE E 5985 Cystal im 68 ud 22 E 206 Or04 RS Strings 4 STR 64 22
5. No Name Voice No Name Voice No Name Voice No Name Voice No Name Voice 0001 Piano 1 2 0071 SA Vibe 1 0141 RS Ac Gtr 2 0211 Juno Bass 1 0281 Warm JP STR 2 0002 Piano 1w 1 0072 Marimba 1 0142 Nylon Steel 0212 MG Bass 2 0282 Saw Strings 2 0003 European Pf 2 0073 Marimba w 1 0143 12str Gtr 2 0213 MG PunchBass 2 0283 Soft JP Str 3 0004 RS Grand 1 2 0074 Xylophone 1 0144 Jazz Gt 0214 MG LiteBass 2 0284 JP Strings 4 0005 RS Grand 2 2 0075 Tubular bell 1 0145 Pedal Steel 0215 Synth Bass2 2 0285 RS Syn Str 2 3 0006 Piano F 2 0076 Church Bell 1 0146 Clean Gt 0216 Beef FM Bass 2 0286 OB Str 1 2 0007 LA Piano 4 0077 Carillon 1 0147 Chorus Gt 2 0217 RubberBass 2 2 0287 OB Str 2 2 0008 Piano 2 2 0078 Singing Bell 2 0148 Mid Tone GTR 0218 Attack Pulse 1 0288 JUNO Strings 2 0009 Piano 2w 0079 Analog Bell 2 0149 St Strat Gtr 0219 TB Bass 1 0289 Choir Aahs 1 2 0010 Mono Piano 0080 Hyper Bell 2 0150 12str EGtr 0220 FatTB Bass 2 0290 Chorus Aahs 2 0011 Piano3 2 0081 Warm Bell 2 0151 E Guitar 0221 Acid TB Bs 1 0291 Choir VSw 2 0012 Piano 3w 0082 RS Crystal 4 0152 Wah Gt 0222 TB Dist Saw 1 0292 Choir Aahs 2 2 0013 Rock Piano 1 2 0083 Chime Bells 4 015
6. Parameters Value Name Patch Name space A Z a z 0 9 1 amp 2 Q Y Ill Category Refer to Selecting a patch by category p 20 Key Mode SINGLE SPLIT DUAL Patch Level 0 127 Tone Balance 64 LOWER 63 UPPER Split Point A0 C8 Split Arp Split Arpeggio UPPER LOWER BOTH Solo Switch OFF ON UPPER LOWER ModulationDst Modulation Destination UPPER LOWER BOTH PitchBend Dst Pitch Bend Destination UPPER LOWER BOTH Modify Dest Modify Destination UPPER LOWER BOTH This is linked with the panel s DESTINATION TONE setting ExpressionDst Expression Destination UPPER LOWER BOTH Active Exp Sw Active Expression Switch OFF ON Patch Tone parameters p 46 Parameters Value No Original Tone Number 0001 0640 Tone Pan L64 63R MFX Switch Multi Effects Switch BYPASS ON Chorus Send Lvl Chorus Send Level 0 127 Reverb Send Lvl Reverb Send Level 0 127 Coarse Tune 48 48 Fine Tune 50 50 Portamento Sw Portamento Switch OFF ON Portamento Time 0 127 Velo Sens Depth Velocity Sensitivity Depth 64 63 Velo Sens Ofs Velocity Sensitivity Offset 64 63 Pitch Bend Range 0 24 Filter LFO Filter LFO Switch OFF PCH ON FLT LFO Rate 64 63 LFO Depth 64 63 LFO Delay 64 63 Cutoff Freq Cutoff Frequency 64 63 Resonance 64 63 Attack Time 64 63 Decay Time 64
7. Button Category Category Contents Group 1 PIANO Pf PNO AC PIANO Acoustic Piano EP EL PIANO Electric Piano 2 KBD amp KEY KEYBOARDS Other Keyboards ORGAN Ky Clav Harpsichord etc BEL BELL Bell Bell Pad MLT MALLET Mallet ORG ORGAN Electric and Church Organ ACD ACCORDION Accordion HRM HARMONICA Harmonica Blues Harp 3 GUITAR Gt AGT AC GUITAR Acoustic Guitar EGT EL GUITAR Electric Guitar DGT DIST GUITAR Distortion Guitar 4 ORCH Oc STR STRINGS Strings ORC ORCHESTRA Orchestra Ensemble HIT HIT amp STAB Orchestra Hit Hit WND WIND Winds Oboe Clarinet etc FLT FLUTE Flute Piccolo 5 WORLD Wr PLK PLUCKED Plucked Harp etc ETH ETHNIC Other Ethnic FRT FRETTED Fretted Inst Mandolin etc 6 BRASS Br BRS AC BRASS Acoustic Brass SBR SYNTH BRASS Synth Brass SAX SAX Sax 7 VOCAL amp BPD BRIGHT PAD Bright Pad Synth PAD Vo SPD SOFT PAD Soft Pad Synth VOX VOX Vox Choir 8 SYNTH Sy HLD HARDLEAD Hard Synth Lead SLD SOFT LEAD Soft Synth Lead TEK TECHNO SYNTH Techno Synth PLS PULSATING Pulsating Synth FX SYNTH FX Synth FX Noise etc SYN OTHERSYNTH Poly Synth 9 BASS Bs BS BASS Acoustic amp Electric Bass SBS SYNTH BASS Synth Bass 0 RHYTHM amp DRM DRUMS Rhythm Set SFX Rh PRC PERCUSSION Percussion SFX SOUND FX Sound FX BTS BEAT amp GROOVE Beat and Groove CMB COMBINATION Other Patches
8. jack anchor the power cord using the cord hook as shown in the illustration AC adaptor e Use only the specified expression pedal EV 5 sold separately By connecting any other Q to AC power outlet expression pedals you cable risk causing 1 malfunction and or B damage to the unit E EEN e Audio cables MIDI SE ii VER qu UE a Tra ra RD SUR CENERE te ee ee cables and stereo Expression pedal EV 5 headphones are not NEM or pedal switch included You will need norder to take full Monitor speakers 7 boues d Audio set etc advantage of the RS 50 s Pedal switch DP 2 DP 8 or foot switch BOSS FS 5U to purchase these items from your dealer performance we recommend using a stereo amp speaker system If you are using a Power amp mono system make you connections to the 1 Before starting the connection procedure make sure that the power to all OUTPUT jack L MONO e CONTROL PEDAL jack can also accommodate 2 Connect the supplied AC adaptor to the RS 50 and then plug its other end pedal switches devices has been turned off into a power outlet 14 Getting ready 3 Connect the RS 50 and the external device as shown in the figure Use audio cables to connect audio equipment such as an amp or speakers If you are using he
9. Parameter Value Description Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the frequency speed of note 2 the change Depth 0 127 Sets the depth to which the ef fect is applied Reset OFF ON This setting determines whether the period for the pattern is reset ON or not OFF when sounds are played While the rhythm guide is play ing the period for the pattern is not reset even if you set this ON RESET i LEVEL wae Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 45 AUTO PAN The Auto Pan effect cyclically modulates the stereo location of the sound Lin 2 Band EQ L out 44 TREMOLO Tremolo cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo effect to the sound 2 Band EQ 2 Band EQ L out R out Parameter Value Description Mod Wave TRI SOR SIN SAW1 2 TRI The sound will be modulat ed like a triangle wave SQR The sound will be modu lated like a square wave SIN The sound will be modulat ed like a sine wave SAW1 2 The sound will be modulated like a sawtooth wave The teeth in SAW1 and SAW2 point at opposite direc tions SAW1 IV VANS SAW2 Parameter Value Description Mod Wave TRI SOR SIN TRI The sound will be modulat SAW1 2 ed like a triangle wave SQR The sound will be modu
10. OUTPUT Tone Rev E MOND Send Level Patch Mode Rhythm Tone MFX Send O cy MFX Send Level to Cho Level to Rev Tone Cho Send Level y Cho Send Level to Rev Tone Rev IMN Send Level 66 Adding effects Making effects settings Selecting effect parameters Select multi effect chorus or reverb parameters as shown below Master Effect Switch PAGE PAGE CURSOR gt CURSOR Tal SHIFT PAGE PAGE SHIFT i CURSOR CURSOR T PAGE Ld pw PAGE CURSOR gt i E CURSOR lt 4 PAGE PAGE CURSOR gt CURSOR Tal Multi Effects Parameters VALUE eS IEE Displays the effect VALUE H type selected Switches the effect type previously SHIFT PAGE PAGE SHIFT CURSOR gt CURSOR al t PAGE PAGE CURSOR gt Displays the parameters for the selected CURSOR al effect type PAGE CURSOR gt PAGE CURSOR Lal rrr 4 1 4 IIII I Chorus Parameters A A SHIFT H SHIFT og PAGE 1 PAGE PAGE Po PAGE CURSOR gt CURSOR P i tr CURSOR Pad CURSOR ai Reverb Parameters C3 PAGE CURSOR gt PAGE CURSOR Lal H Effects 67 Adding effects 1 Press EFFECTS so it is lit 10 LIMITER p 72 The on off sta
11. 1 SINGLE 319 Bri3 F HomSect1 BRS 6 Tel 1 SINGLE 386 Vo08 FemMmChoir VOX 65 09 1 SINGLE 320 Bri4 FHornSect2 BRS 6 6 TI 2 DUAL 387 Vo04 RS Choir Vox 65 Wo 2 SINGLE 321 Bri5 Wide FrHorns BRS 6 7 2 SINGLE 388 Vo05 StChoirAhs Vox 65 u 4 SINGLE 322 Bri6 Str Horns BRS 6 Tel 2 SINGLE 389 Vo06 SH 2000Vox VOX 65 Ter Ce 1 SINGLE 325 Bri7 Orch Brass 1 BRS 6 Tei TI 2 SINGLE 390 Vo07 RS SynVox 1 Vox 65 isles ii 2 SINGLE 324 Bris Orch Brass 2 BRS 6 Ta TI 2 SINGLE 391 Vo08 FM Vox Vox 65 VII 1 SINGLE 325 Bri9 StOrchBrs 1 BRS es mr prem ldem 2 SINGLE 392 Vo09 Vox Pad Vox 65 i 2 SINGLE 326 Br20 StOrchBrs 2 BRS 6 Ta TI 4 SINGLE 393 Vol 0 ChaosChori VOX 65 16 7 esq P 8 DUAL 113 No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2Patch Select Voice Key No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2 Patch Select Voice Key gory MSB 87 MSB 121 Mode gory MSB 87 MSB 121 Mode LSB PC LSB PC LSB PC LSB
12. ccce 120 Arpeggio style IS epe 122 Multi chord set list co i0 c20cccccccssesscsccccnssecssececccasiesceiccsserecsussteessecesccsseds 122 MIDI implementation chart Leeeeeeee cere eee 124 SpecifiCatlOris i ecco onec noon oe 3 51352222025001220 daidi Abiamo dadana SAA ka 125 Je qi r 126 Main Features A broad range of new high quality sounds Careful attention has been paid to refining the most important sounds for a live keyboard such as piano organ strings and brass In addition the latest cutting edge sounds are also included The General MIDI score conforming to General MIDI General MIDI 2 is also supported with high quality sounds Quick and easy sound editing To edit the sounds patches of the RS 50 you simply choose from the wide range of tones pre programmed instrumental sounds and edit them Editing is easy you can adjust the brightness filter attack and decay modulation LFO and effects or layer two tones to create a rich sound Numerous phrase arpeggio templates In addition to an arpeggio function the instrument also features phrase templates which allow you to activate performance techniques geared toward a particular sound as well as typical phrases simply by pressing a key great tools for music production Multi chord memory function The Chord Memory function lets you play a registered chord by pressing a
13. sess 63 Arpeggio Shuffle Rate en 63 Arpeggio Shuffle Resolution sss 63 Arpeggio Style sss 62 Arpeggio Variation sss 62 Assign a name EE 43 Patch Name ees 45 Performance Name EE 56 Rhythm Set Name 7 eee 52 ASSIGNADBLE 3 nphtbesibua eoo natale 33 Attack Ime aee ER Nee tete 28 48 C C1 C3 C1 C3 Knob Assign sees 90 Category Luce dete egre d dr tegens 45 Category groups a ae AT eE EATE 20 Channel messages En 92 Character E 87 Chord Memory ce aree rite ite er pens 64 Chorus eere ite aie 35 Chorus Delay Time ee 86 VE ER e EE 87 Chorus Feedback Level 86 Chorus Level eene ene eene 86 Chorus Parameters ENEE 86 Chorus pre low pass filter sss 86 Chorus Rate ete eee 86 Chorus send level to reverb sss 87 Chorus Send Lvl Chorus Send Level Patch Tone Parameters 46 Performance Part Effects e 58 Rhythm Tone Parameters 53 Chorus Type oeste titi sete on onera 86 Clock Source ines eet ttd tede 89 Coarse T ne eee pe ne tenere 46 Control Change eee 93 CONTROLLER seri he et obe i eer 89 Ctrl 1 2 Multi Effects Control 1 2 69 Current Part nee eere nee ween pet 40 CUPS OL ia osa te 42 CUTOEP snusning isnin siete 29 Cutoff Freq Cutoff Frequency sss 47 D D Beam Controller meme 31 DBEAM POLARI
14. 1 In Patch mode press 1 to select piano sounds 2 Press PHRASE ARPEGGIO so it is lit 3 Play the keyboard The instrument will play an arpeggio according to the notes you have just voiced E Changing the way in which the arpeggios are sounded Then try to change the way in which the arpeggios are sounded Settings that specify how arpeggios are sounded are provided as templates By switching templates you can change the way in which the arpeggios are sounded 4 Press 0 9 Play a phrase Play an arpeggio by pressing one key by pressing a chord It switches to an arpeggio template suitable for the selected sound Pressing 0 will select the user template User template p 24 wm 1 Bn Ba D B a 7 D D Bm mm EEE sms Arpeggio template list p BEEN PIANO MS GUITAR ORCH WORLD BRASS erty SYNTH BASS 120 T Preset Arpeggio Phrase templates User templates 23 Try out the sounds 6 When you press EXIT the Arpeggio function will remain on and you will return to the previous screen If you want to select an arpeggio template once again press PHRASE ARPEGGIO so it goes out and then press PHRASE ARPEGGIO once again so it is lit The selected arpeggio template remains stored in memory even while the power is off To finish playing arpeggios press PHRASE ARPEGGIO again so the indicator goes out User template The user template lets you set the various ar
15. cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet emm Mmmm ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is AN level and sure to remain stable Never place it on stands that could wobble or on inclined surfaces e Before using this unit make sure to read the instructions below and the Owner s Manual e Do not open or modify in any way the unit or its e Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with AC adaptor the unit Also make sure the line voltage at the installation matches the input voltage specified on the AC adaptor s body Other AC adaptors may use a different polarity or be designed for a different voltage so their use could result in damage malfunction or electric shock e Do not attempt to repair the unit or replace parts S within it except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page 9 Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards e Never use or store the unit in places that are e Subject to temperature extremes e g direct Le sunlight in an enclosed vehicle near a heating duct on top of heat generatin
16. 1 Use OCT to transpose the pitch You can transpose the pitch of the keyboard in 1 octave units 3 3 octaves 30 Applying various effects to the sound Moving the key range in half steps TRANSPOSE This function moves the key range in half step units This is convenient in situations like the ones below i S x KS 5 S When matching the vocalist s register Sometimes melodies may extend outside a vocalist s register Therefore if you want to perform with the song changed to a different key you can play the song in a new key while still using the same fingering as before When changing from a difficult key to one that is easy to play You can use simple fingerings to play difficult songs that include numerous sharps or flats When playing with the tone of a transposed instrument You can play the patches of a transposed instrument just as it is written in the score PATCH MODIFY 1 While holding down SHIFT press OCT You can transpose your performance over a range of 5 6 semitones Waving your hand over the D Beam D Beam Controller The D Beam controller can be used simply by waving your hand over it Of the three buttons one is assigned to the solo synth another to the active expression effect and the third button can be assigned to the function of your choice You can also create
17. 3 DUAL Se a SA Malet iim d x SS med em 207 Or05 RS Strings 5 STR 64 23 2 SINGLE 47 Ky87 Tinkle Bell BEL 68 75 0 113 3 SINGLE 308 Tone VeloString s STR a m s DUAL 48 Ky88 Steel Drums MLT 68 77 0 115 1 SINGLE ms 209 Or07 SlowStrings1 STR 64 25 F 2 SINGLE 210 Or08 SlowStrings2 STR 64 26 2 SINGLE 3 GUITAR 211 Or09 Oct Strings STR 64 27 2 SINGLE 212 Or10 Str Spic 1 STR 64 28 1 SINGLE No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2Patch Select Voice Key 213 Or11 Str Spic 2 STR 65 1 e 2 DUAL gory MSB 87 MSB 121 Mode 214 Or12 Tron Strings STR 65 2 1 SINGLE LSB PC LSB PC 215 Or13 Dance Str STR 65 3 1 SINGLE 49 Gt01 StSteel Gtr AGT 64 93 2 SINGLE 216 Orl4 LoFi Strings STR 65 4 2 SINGLE 50 Gt02 RS Ac Guitar AGT 64 94 1 SINGLE 217 Or15 RS Orch1 STR 65 5 3 SINGLE 51 Gt03 12str Gtr 2 AGT 64 95 2 SINGLE 218 Orl6 RS Orch 2 STR 65 6 4 DUAL 52 Gt04 Hybrid12stGt AGT 64 96 4 DUAL 219 Or17 HybrdStrings STR 65 7 5 DUAL 53 Gt05 Nylon Steel AGT 64 97 2 SINGLE 220 Or18 JP Strings 1 STR 65 8 5 DUAL 54 Gt06 Nylon Guitar AGT 64 98 2 SINGLE 221 Or19 JP Strings 2 STR 65 9 3 DUAL 55 Gt07 Spanish Gtr AGT 64 99 2 SINGLE 222 Or20 JP Strings 3 STR 65 10 3 SINGLE 56 Gt08 Requint Gtr AGT 64
18. 63 Octave Shift eicere tette tier teo ede doe qure eot 30 Original Tone Number een 46 P pages aciei dant etie det ie ee ite 42 Pan Part PAM sss a e ete e RARE 56 Rhythm Tone Parameter 52 Parameters dee ette deer 42 J EET GE 40 43 Patt Patcli Edit ze EE 57 Part Scale Tune CB 58 Part Setup icto e eei e ees res 56 Part Setup Parameters see 56 Patchs al GERE ts 20 Patch Auditoire emeena eet e edet re dades deae 22 Patch categories sss 49 Patch Common Parameters 45 PATCH INITIALIZE ENEE 50 Patel Level erte EEN 45 Patch Mode eee 42 44 52 Patch Modify entender tee 26 Patch parameters eege deeg eee tet ees 44 PATCH PRM COPY 2 eerte 49 PATCH REMOVE 4 ee nemo eee tend 50 Patch Rx Ch Patch Receive Channel 90 PATCH SCALE on netten le er 91 Patch Scale Tune CB 91 Patch Tone Parameters sse 46 Patch Tx Ch Patch Transmit Channel 90 Patch Utility ltr tette 49 NN TE 40 Pedal rtr tt te aeo e e ps 30 Pedal Pedal Control Assign ee 90 Perform Ctrl Ch Performance Control Channel 90 PERFORM INIT A 60 Performance Common Parameters 56 Performance Mode AAA 42 Performance Part Effect AA 58 Performance Utility sss 59 Phrase templates ote eere eem ete 62 Phrase Arpeggio sese 23 Pitehiu d eti e tnt eda itte te este ema 52 Pitch Bend Chan
19. Try out the sounds PATCH MODIFY Quick Start 12 P PATCH it is lit and in Patch mode ress so itis lit and you are in Patch mode MEMO 2 Use 0 9 to specify the category group of the patch you want to select The rhythm sets are included in 0 p 22 weus 3 Use VALUE to select sounds within the category group You can turn NUMERIC Selecting sounds by category on and use the 0 9 In Patch mode the direct access buttons 0 9 act as category select buttons numeric keys to input a Since the patches you select for 0 9 each category will be remembered even patch number directly when the power is turned off you can select ten favorite patches from the panel and Press ENTER to finalize recall those patches instantly just by pressing 0 9 the number p 43 Patch list p 111 21 Try out the sounds E Selecting patches while listening to phrases Patch Audition Without playing keyboards you can audition the sounds using phrases that have been pre programmed to be suitable for the character of each patch PATCH MODIFY 1 Press AUDITION The currently selected patch will begin sounding 2 Select patches as described in Selecting a patch by category p 20 3 Press AUDITION once again or press EX
20. If envelope is selected ENV indicator lit ATTACK knob Adjusts the attack speed of the sound p 28 DECAY knob Adjusts the speed at which the sound decays while you continue holding the key p 28 RELEASE knob Adjusts the length of the release after you take your finger off the key p 28 12 If balance LFO is selected BALANCE LFO indicator lit BALANCE knob Adjusts the LOWER and UPPER volume balance p 26 LFO RATE knob Adjusts the rate of the LFO effect such as vibrato p 27 LFO DEPTH knob Adjusts the depth of the LFO effect such as vibrato p 27 KEY MODE button Switches the Key Modes p 44 FILTER LFO button This determines whether the LFO changes the filter cutoff frequency ON or the pitch OFF p 27 CUTOFF knob Changes the tone s Cutoff Frequency value p 29 RESONANCE knob Changes the tone s Resonance value p 29 l Pitch bend Modulation lever This allows you to control pitch bend or apply vibrato p 29 Panel descriptions Rear panel m m m Q 3 e 9 USE ROLAND ACI OR PBB 1U ADAPTOR ONLY A MIDI connectors IN OUT These connectors can be connected to other MIDI devices to receive and transmit MIDI messages p 92 Use MIDI cables sold separately to make connections IN MIDI messages from an external device are received at this connector OUT MIDI messages are transmitted f
21. Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the direct sound and the modulation delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the modulation delay sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 20 3 TAP DELAY Triple Tap Delay The Triple Tap Delay produces three delay sounds center left and right L in Rin o Tis Tap Dei pem Feedback Balance D Balance D L out Parameter Value Description Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the direct sound and the delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the delay sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 21 4 TAP DELAY Quadruple Tap Delay The Quadruple Tap Delay has four delays L in Balance D Balance D The stereo location of each delay sound is as follows 2 1 4 L R Parameter Value Description Delay 1 0 840 ms Adjusts the time delay from the note 1 direct sound until when delay 1 sound is heard Delay 2 0 840 ms Adjusts the time delay from the no
22. Applying various effects to the sound The LFO short for low frequency oscillator makes changes to the sound in periodic fashion Changing the pitch with the LFO produces the vibrato effect and by changing the filter cutoff frequency with the LFO you get what is called the wah effect E S x KS 5 O PATCH MODIFY Press the patch modify select button to make the BALANCE LFO indicator light MEM Make sure that FILTER LFO is off unlit If it is on lit press When FILTER LFO is off the two LFO knobs will adjust the vibrato effect FILTER LFO once again so it goes out Turn the LFO DEPTH knob Turning this to the right clockwise increases the depth of the undulating sound MEMO while turning it to the left counterclockwise makes the undulation shallower and FILTER LFO does not milder take effect on a rhythm set Turn the LFO RATE knob Turning this to the right clockwise increases the speed of the undulating sound while turning it to the left counterclockwise slows the undulation down Press FILTER LFO so it is lit When FILTER LFO is on the two LFO knobs will adjust the wah effect Turn the LFO DEPTH knob Turning this to the right clockwise increases the depth of the undulating sound while turning it to the left counterclockwise makes the undulation shal
23. Balance D J pu Rin O Balance D Parameter Value Description Type ROOM1 ROOM2 STAGE1 STAGE2 HALL1 HALL2 Selects the type of Reverb effect ROOM dense reverb with short decay ROOM 2 sparse reverb with short decay STAGE1 reverb with greater late reverberation STAGE2 reverb with strong ear ly reflections HALL1 reverb with clear rever berance HALL2 reverb with rich rever berance Pre Delay 0 0 100 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the reverb sound is heard Time 0 127 Adjusts the time length of rever beration HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS Adjusts the frequency above which the reverberant sound will be cut As the frequency is set lower more of the high frequencies will be cut resulting in a softer and more muted reverberance If you do not want the high fre quencies to be cut set this pa rameter to BYPASS Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the direct sound and the reverb sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the reverb sound will be output Level D100 0W D0 100W Balance Adjusts the volume balance be tween the direct s
24. PATCH in the above step 6 and select the patch assigned to that part in step 7 to copy the effect settings of the patch Initializing the parameters of a performance PERFORM INIT This operation initializes the performance settings Since all performance parameters will be initialized this is convenient when you want to create a performance from scratch yon The Initialize operation applies only to the currently selected performance it will not change the content of other performances stored in user memory If you want to restore all settings to the factory set condition execute the Factory Reset operation p 17 1 Press PERFORM so it is lit and you are in Performance mode Select a performance you want to initialize 2 Press UTILITY 3 Use PAGE CURSOR lt to select 2 PERFORM INIT 4 Press ENTER 5 Press ENTER once again to execute When initialization is finished the display will indicate COMPLETED This ends the procedure Playing more than one sound simultaneously Performance mode Transmitting performance settings from the MIDI OUT connector XFER to MIDI You can transmit the settings of the current performance or user performance from the MIDI OUT connector This function lets you save performance settings on an external sequencer If you select DUMP ALL for the menu you can transmit all data stored in the user area to an external sequencer all data
25. e cursor Basic procedure The basic procedure for editing a parameter is to use PAGE CURSOR lt gt to move between pages and use VALUE to modify the value in the page VALUE CJ CJ PAGE CURSOR gt 14 JUMP gt In cases where there are numerous pages pages of related content are organized into groups When editing such parameters you can hold down SHIFT and use PAGE CURSOR a to jump to the previous or next group MEM When using PAGE CURSOR gt or VALUE you can make the value change more rapidly by holding down one button while you press the other button Or if you hold down SHIFT while using these buttons the value will change in larger steps or you can move between sound category groups p 55 MEM gt PAGE CURSOR lt gt will move you more rapidly between pages if you continue holding them down In some cases you will automatically stop at the beginning of the group Executing a command If ENT is indicated in the upper right of the display you can execute the command you have selected by pressing ENTER In the example above pressing ENTER executes the Patch Parameter copy p 49 Basic operation of the RS 50 Assigning a name As an exception in pages where you can assign a name to a patch or performance pressing PAGE CURSOR will not immediately take you to the next page The cursor will move t
26. nT B MIDI IN Z oo Imm zc D MIDI OUT Sound Module B ii miso Oia Bees E s oonono5 o no 6 ss a RS 50 Messages received at the MIDI IN connector are output from the MIDI THRU connector unchanged Example 3 Connecting to three or more external MIDI sound modules MIDI IN p MIDI Patcher Sound Module A B MIDI IN oo EE DI Sound Module B MIDI OUT 1 93 Performing with an external MIDI device Ifyou daisy chain three or more MIDI devices using IN 2 THRU IN gt THRU the MIDI signal may become garbled and data errors may occur In such cases use a MIDI Patcher MIDI Patcher are devices that allow a single stream of MIDI data to be sent to a large number of MIDI devices without causing data errors 1 Before starting the connection procedure make sure that the power to all devices has been turned off 2 After reading Connecting the RS 50 to external equipment p 14 connect an audio device system or headphones 3 Connect the external MIDI sound device with the MIDI cable as shown in the figure above 4 As described in Turning on the power p 15 turn on the power of each device Set the keyboard transmit channel When you have finished connecting
27. 63 Release Time 64 63 Patch Effects parameters The same parameters are also provided for Rhythm sets Parameters Value Multi effects group Type Multi effects Type 00 THROUGH 47 FBK RIPPER Multi effects Parameters The number of parameters varies depending on the Multi effects Type Refer to Setting multi effects parameters p 68 Send Lvl to Cho Multi effect send level to chorus 0 127 Send Lvl to Rev Multi effect send level to reverb 0 127 Ctrl 1 Multi effects Control 1 Refer to Setting multi effects parameters p 68 Ctrl 2 Multi effects Control 2 Refer to Setting multi effects parameters p 68 Chorus effects group Type Chorus type CHORUSI CHORUS CHORUS3 CHORUS4 FEEDBACK CHORUS FLANGER SHORT DELAY SHORT DELAY FB Pre LPF Chorus pre low pass filter 0 7 Level Chorus Level 0 127 106 Parameter list Parameters Value Feedback Chorus Feedback Level 0 127 Delay Chorus Delay Time 0 127 Rate Chorus Rate 0 127 Depth Chorus Depth 0 127 Send Lvl to Rev Chorus send level to reverb 0 127 Reverb effects group Type Reverb Type ROOMI ROOM2 ROOM3 HALL1 HALL2 PLATE DELAY PANNING DELAY Character Reverb Character 0 7 Pre LPF Reverb pre low pass filter 0 7 Level Reverb Level 0 127 Time Reverb Time 0 127 Delay Feedback Reverb Delay Feedback 0 127 Rhythm Patches Rhythm Common pa
28. Advanced Use Overview of the RS 50 How the instrument is organized Basic structure Broadly speaking the RS 50 consists of a keyboard controller section and a sound generator section Sound Generator Section Wr mm Keyboard Controller Section controllers such as keyboard pitch bend lever etc Keyboard controller section This section consists of the keyboard pitch bend modulation lever panel knobs and buttons and D Beam controller It also includes any pedals that may be connected to the rear panel The performance information generated when you do things such as press release a key or depress the hold pedal is sent to the sound generator section and or an external sound device Sound generator section According to the performance data it receives from the Keyboard Controller section this section generates and outputs sounds from the output jacks and headphone jack Up to sixteen parts can each play different sounds patches with a simultaneous total of up to 64 notes This section also includes three effects reverb chorus multi effects Classification of RS 50 sound types When using the RS 50 you will notice that a variety of different categories come into play when working with sounds What follows is a simple explanation of each sound category Tones On the RS 50 the tones are the smallest unit of sound However it is not possible to pla
29. Performing with an external MIDI device Set the same Device ID number used for recording p 91 If not set to the same Device ID number the performance settings recorded at the beginning of the song cannot be received Make sure to start playback at the beginning of the song When playback of a song is started at any point other than the beginning the performance settings at the time of recording are not used and the song is not played back correctly Playing together with the playback of a recorded performance You can play the RS 50 s keyboard along with a previous performance by playing while the recorded material is played back In this case select a Part that was not recorded for playing the keyboard Transposing playback of performances Master Key Shift If you wish to transpose the playback of a song use the Master Key Shift setting This setting will transpose all Parts except for the Drum Part You can specify a transposition of up to 2 octaves in semitone steps 1 Press SYSTEM so it is lit 2 Use PAGE CURSOR a We to select Master Key Sft 3 Use VALUE to specify the value 24 24 Value 24 24 4 Press WRITE to save the settings For further information refer to How to make the system function settings p 88 Press EXIT to cancel the operation and return to the previous page Backing up saving all RS 50 settings on your external MIDI seq
30. BPD 66 9 SS SS 2 SINGLE 491 Sy42 Time Warp TE 66 66 ze 3 SINGLE 425 Vo42 Power Stack BPD 66 20 3 DUAL 492 Sy43 Riff the 5th TE 66 67 2 SINGLE 426 Vo43 DanceStack BPD 66 21 5 DUAL 493 Sy44 Seq Pulse TE 66 68 2 SINGLE 427 Vo44 Trance Pad BPD 66 22 2 SINGLE 494 Sy45 Chord Maj7 TE 66 69 4 SINGLE 428 Vo45 RS Rave BPD 66 23 5 DUAL 495 Sy46 Just Before FX 66 70 4 SINGLE 429 Vo46 AEx StackPad BPD 66 24 6 DUAL 496 Sy47 Square Wave HLD 68 28 0 81 2 SINGLE 430 Vo47 Syn Strings2 SPD 67 110 0 52 2 SINGLE 497 Sy48 MG Square HLD 68 29 1 81 1 SINGLE 431 Vo48 Choir Aahs VOX 67 111 0 53 2 SINGLE 498 Sy49 2600 Sine HLD 68 30 2 81 1 SINGLE 432 Vo49 Chorus Aahs VOX 67 112 53 2 SINGLE 499 Sy50 Saw Wave HLD 68 31 0 82 2 SINGLE 433 Vo50 Voice Oohs VOX 67 113 0 54 1 SINGLE 500 Sy51 OB2 Saw HLD 68 32 1 82 1 SINGLE 434 Vo51 Humming VOX 67 114 54 2 SINGLE 501 Sy52 Doctor Solo HLD 68 33 2 82 2 SINGLE 435 Vo52 SynVox VOX 67 115 0 55 2 SINGLE 502 Sy53 Natural Lead HLD 68 34 3 82 2 SINGLE 436 Vo53 Analog Voice VOX 67 116 55 1 SINGLE 503 Sy54 SequencedSaw HLD 68 35 4 82 2 SINGLE 437 Vo54 Warm Pad SPD 68 45 0 90 1 SINGLE 504 Sy55 Syn Calliope SLD 68 36 0 83 2 SINGLE 438 Vo55 Sine Pad SPD 68 46 90 2 SINGLE 505 Sy56 Chiffer Lead SLD 68 37 0 84 2 SINGLE 439 Vo56 Space Voice VOX 68 48 0 92 2 SINGLE 506 Sy57 Chara
31. Cabasa 1 Cabasa 1 TR909 Tom 1 Cowbell 1 LIEB Maracas 1 TR808Maracas 1 Maracas 1 TR909 OHH EXC1 1 TR808Cowbell 1 a ShortWhistle EXC3 1 ShortWhistle EXC3 1 ShortWhistle EXCS3 1 TR909 Tom 1 Vibraslap 1 C572 LongWhistle2 EXC3 1 LongWhistle2 EXC3 1 LongWhistle2 EXC3 1 TR909 Tom 1 Shaker 1 EXC6 1 7 Shaker Sw 1 Cuica Sw 1 Guiro Short EXC4 1 TR909 Crash 1 Shaker 2 EXC6 1 74 Cuica Sw 1 Shaker Sw 1 Guiro Long EXC4 1 TR909 Tom 1 Shaker Sw 1 EZB Castanets 2 2 TR808 Clave 1 Shaker2 1 TR909 Ride 1 1 Guiro Short EXC7 1 76 Triangl Mt 2 EXC6 1 Guiro Sw 1 Castanets 1 ChinaCymbal2 2 Guiro Long EXC7 1 77 Triangl Op 2 EXC6 1 Castanets 2 2 TR808 Clave 1 TR909RideBl1 1 Guiro Sw 1 EZ Bell Tree 1 Triangl Mt 1 EXC6 1 Cuica Mute EXC5 1 TR808Maracas 1 Triangl Mt 1 EXC8 1 79 Jingle Bell 1 Triangl Op 1 EXC6 1 Cuica Open EXC5 1 TR909 Splash 1 Triangl Op 1 EXC8 1 SR WindChimeDwn 1 Jingle Bell 1 Bell Tree 1 TR808Cowbell 1 Triangl Mt 2 EXC9 1 81 Surdo Mute EXC7 1 Surdo Mute EXC7 1 Surdo Mute EXC7 1 TR909 Crash 1 Triangl Op 2 EXC9 1 GR Surdo Open EXC7 1 Surdo Open EXC7 1 Surdo Open EXC7 1 TR808 Clave 1 Agogo 1 FingerSnap 1 FingerSnap 1 FingerSnap 1 TR909 Ride 2 1 Agogo 1 C6la4 TR909 Clap 2 1 TR909 Clap2 1 TR909 Clap 1 1 NoiseCymbal 1 ShortWhistle EXC10 1 ES R808 Clap 1 TR808 Clap 1 TR808 Clap 1 TR909 Clap 1 1 Long Whistle EXC10 1 86 TR909 Clap 1 1 Rev 909Crash 1 Rev
32. VALUE 1 16 OFF ore If only a program change is received and if the Perform Ctrl Ch parameter setting coincides with the MIDI receive channel of a part priority will be given to switching the performance MEM If this is set to 1 16 the RS 50 will transmit MIDI messages program change bank select on that channel when the performance is switched Rx Prog Chg Receive Program Change Switch Specifies whether Program Change messages will be received ON or not OFF VALUE OFF ON Rx Bank Sel Receive Bank Select Switch Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be received ON or not OFF VALUE OFF ON Rx Sys Exc Receive System Exclusive Switch Specifies whether System Exclusive messages will be received ON or not OFF VALUE OFF ON Tx Prog Chg Transmit Program Change Switch Specifies whether Program Change messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF VALUE OFF ON Tx Bank Sel Transmit Bank Select Switch Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF VALUE OFF ON Settings common to all modes System Function Tx Edit Data Transmit Edit Data Switch Specify whether changes you make in the settings of a patch or performance will be transmitted as system exclusive messages ON or will not be transmitted OFF VALUE OFF ON lt 2 c E Ww E 7 ia 2 gt n Tx Active Sens Transmit Active Sensing Switch Specifies wheth
33. 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 258 0211 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II Edificio No 4010 San Salvador EL SALVADOR TEL 262 0788 Roland Corporation MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 55 5668 6699 PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PANAMA TEL 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL 021 492 124 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C P 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02 924 2335 VENEZUELA Musicland Digital C A Av Francisco de Miranda Centro Parque de Cristal Nivel C2 Local 20 Caracas VENEZUELA TEL 212 285 8586 AUSTRIA Roland Austria GES M B H Siemensstrasse 4 P O Box 74 A 6063 RUM AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BELGIUM HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Benelux N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 C
34. 33 B VOLUME knob Adjusts the overall volume that is output from the rear panel OUTPUT jacks and PHONES jack p 15 C MODE Section PATCH button Switches the RS 50 into the Patch mode p 42 PERFORMANCE button Switches the RS 50 into the Performance mode p 42 DEMO button Accesses the demo playback function p 18 EDIT Section PARAM Parameter button This button accesses sound or performance settings parameters The settings that are accessed will depend on the selected mode Patch Performance or state EFFECTS button This button switches effects MFX chorus reverb on off and accesses effect related settings UTILITY button In Patch Performance modes this button accesses various utility functions such as those for copying data or initializing sound generator settings Others SYSTEM button This button accesses settings that affect the entire RS 50 such as tuning display contrast and MIDI message reception PART SELECT button When this button is lit in Performance mode you can use the direct access buttons to select a part to play from the keyboard or to edit p 43 AUDITION button You can repeatedly listen to an audition phrase for the currently selected patch p 22 10 Panel descriptions dl i AAL Saves patch performance settings or system settings OCT Octave Shift TRANSPOSE Tra
35. BS 67 79 0 34 SINGLE 575 Bs57 Finger Slap BS 67 80 1 34 2 SINGLE 576 Bs58 Picked Bass BS 67 81 0 35 SINGLE 577 Bs59 Fretless Bs BS 67 82 0 36 SINGLE 578 Bs60 Slap Bass 1 BS 67 83 0 37 SINGLE 579 Bs61 Slap Bass 2 BS 67 84 0 38 2 SINGLE 580 Bs62 Synth Bass 1 SBS 67 85 0 39 SINGLE 581 Bs63 SynthBass101 SBS 67 86 1 39 SINGLE 582 Bs64 Acid Bass SBS 67 87 2 39 SINGLE 583 Bs65 Clavi Bass SBS 67 88 3 39 2 SINGLE 584 Bs66 Hammer SBS 67 89 4 39 2 SINGLE 585 Bs67 Synth Bass 2 SBS 67 90 0 40 2 SINGLE 586 Bs68 Beef FM Bass SBS 67 91 1 40 2 SINGLE 587 Bs69 RubberBass 2 SBS 67 92 2 40 2 SINGLE 588 Bs70 Attack Pulse SBS 67 93 3 40 1 SINGLE 115 Rhythm set list Rh01 Standard Kit Rh02 Rock Kit Rh03 Jazz Kit Rh04 Brush Kit Rh05 Orch Kit PC 001 Voice PC 002 Voice PC 003 Voice PC 004 Voice PC 005 Voice Heat o NB ah 8 EN EN 21 EH DU clea fee Lr Tubular bel 1 E A 3 3 9 X 3 4 A A Tubular be 1 26 LM LZ LLL soe Tubular be 1 EE r snr 1 2 RSSnr3 2 DrySnr1 1 Dry Snr2 1 Tubular bel 1 28 Sharp Kick 2 Old Kick 2 Sharp Kick 2 MixKick 1 Tubular bel 1 29 Old Kick 2 Sharp Kick 2 Mix Kick 1 JazzDryKick2 2 Tubular be 1 LEJ RS Snr 4 2 RSSnr4 2 DrySnr2 1 Jazz Rim 1 Tubular be 1 31 OldSharpKick 2 RS Kick 1 2 JazzDryKick1 2 JazzDryKick1 2 Tubu
36. F3 C4 E4 D D7 9 D3 F 3 C4 E4 D D maj7 D 3 A 3 D4 G4 D D 7 9 D 3 G3 C 4 F 4 D D 7 9 D 3 G3 CH4 FA E Cadd9 on E E3 C4 D4 G4 E E 7 9 E3 G 3 D4 G4 E E7 9 E3 G 3 D4 G4 F Fmaj9 F2 A3 E4 G4 F Fmaj9 F3 A3 E4 G4 F F7 9 F2 A3 D 4 G4 F Dadd9 on F F 2 A3 D4 E4 F F 7 9 F 3 A 3 E4 A4 F F dim7 F 2 A3 C4 D 4 G Cadd9 on G G2 D4 E4 G4 G G7 13 G2 F3 B3 E4 G G7 13 G2 F3 B3 E4 Gi F 6 on Ab G 2 C4 D4 F4 G G 7 13 G 2 F 3 C4 FA G G dim7 G 2 B3 D4 F4 A F on A A2 A3 C4 FA A A 7 11 A2 G3 C4 DA A A7 b13 A2 G3 CH F4 Ad G on Bb A42 A 3 D4 G4 A Bb9 A42 GIG C4 D4 Adt Bb7 13 A42 GIG D4 G4 B G on B B2 B3 D4 G4 B B 7 11 B2 A3 D4 E4 B B 7 b5 B2 A3 D4 F4 2 Pop 2 4 Jazz 2 6 Trad Maj Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of Key Chord Forms Key Chord Forms Key Chord Forms C Cmaj9 C3 E3 B3 D4 c C69 C3 E3 A3 D4 C C C3 E4 G4 C5 CH C dim7 C 3 G3 A 3 E4 CH CH9 C 3 F3 B3 D 4 CH C dim7 C 3 E4 G4 A 4 D D 9 D3 F3 C4 E4 D D 9 D3 F3 C4 E4 D D D3 D4 F4 A4 D Didim7 D 3 A3 C4 F 4 D D 9 D 3 G3 C 4 F4 D D dim7 D 3 F 4 A4 C5 E E 7 E3 B3 D4 G4 E E 9 E3 G3 D4 F 4 E E E3 E4 G4 B4 F Fmaj9 E3 A3 E4 G4 F F 9 F2 G 3 D 4 G4 F F F3 F4 A4 C5 I F 7 b5 F 3 A3 C4 E4 Fi F 7 b5 F 2 A3 C4 E4 F F 7 b5 F 3 E4 A4 C5 G G7sus4 9 13 G
37. Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama J1 Cideng Timur No 15J 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD 140 amp 142 Jalan Bukit Bintang 55100 Kuala Lumpur MALAYSIA TEL 03 2144 3333 PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 SINGAPORE Swee Lee Company 150 Sims Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 6846 3676 CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD Blk 3014 Bedok Industrial Park E 3102 2148 SINGAPORE 489980 TEL 6243 9555 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN R O C TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 330 Verng NakornKasem Soi 2 Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 2248821 VIETNAM Saigon Music Suite DP 8 40 Ba Huyen Thanh Quan Street Hochiminh City VIETNAM Tel 08 930 1969 AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND AUSTRALIA Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA TEL 02 9982 8266 NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Ltd 32 Shaddock Street Mount Eden Auckland NEW ZEALAND TEL 09 3098 715 ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055
38. Soft Pad 2 SPD 66 4 SINGLE 476 Sy27 Rndm Ending PLS 66 51 2 SINGLE 410 Vo27 Oct SynStr SPD 66 5 5 DUAL 477 Sy28 Rndm Pad PLS 66 52 3 SINGLE 411 Vo28 Stacked Pad SPD 66 6 2 SINGLE 478 Sy29 Etherality PLS 66 53 4 SINGLE 412 Vo29 RS Saw Pad BPD 66 7 4 SINGLE 479 Sy30 Saw Impulse PLS 66 54 3 SINGLE 413 Vo30 SuperJupiter BPD 66 8 4 SINGLE 480 Sy31 LFO Pad PLS 66 55 4 SINGLE 414 Vo31 ReverseSweep BPD 66 9 2 SINGLE 481 Sy32 RS Strobe PLS 66 56 c 6 DUAL 415 Vo32 RS Atmos BPD 66 0 5 DUAL 482 Sy33 Step Pad PLS 66 57 4 SINGLE 416 Vo33 RS Combing BPD 66 1 4 SINGLE 483 Sy34 RndmFltrChrd PLS 66 58 4 SINGLE 417 Vo34 Comb Pad BPD 66 2 4 SINGLE 484 Sy35 Slicer PLS 66 59 5 DUAL 418 Vo35 Saws Strobe BPD 66 3 8 DUAL 485 Sy36 Sugar Key SYN 66 60 2 SINGLE 419 Vo36 Star Dust BPD 66 4 4 SINGLE 486 Sy37 Bell Sugar SYN 66 61 3 SINGLE 420 Vo37 RS Wind Pad BPD 66 5 F DUAL 487 Sy38 BriteSawKey SYN 66 62 2 SINGLE 421 Vo38 Shakupad BPD 66 6 3 SINGLE 488 Sy39 RS WireKeys SYN 66 63 3 SINGLE 422 Vo39 Sweep Stack BPD 66 7 4 SINGLE 489 Sy40 DualWireKeys SYN 66 64 5 DUAL 423 Vo40 Reso Pad BPD 66 8 Ss 2 SINGLE 490 Sy41 Trance Keys SYN 66 65 x ee 3 SINGLE 424 Vo41 ForwardSweep
39. TR909 Rim 1 Jingle Bell 1 Jingle Bell 1 Jingle Bell 1 Jingle Bell 1 C6la4 TR808 Rim 1 Bell Tree 1 Bell Tree 1 Bell Tree 1 Bell Tree 1 e zz ns cH ESCH 1 Castanets 1 Castanets 1 Castanets 1 Castanets 1 86 RS CHH 2 EXC1 1 Surdo Mute EXC6 1 Surdo Mute EXC6 1 Surdo Mute EXC6 1 Surdo Mute EXC6 1 EM RS CHH3 EXC1 1 Surdo Open EXC6 1 Surdo Open EXC6 1 Surdo Open EXC6 1 Surdo Open EXC6 1 88 RS CHH 4 EXC 4d mI e E 89 RS CHH 5 EXC1 1 LE RS CHH 6 EXC1 1 91 Close HiHat EXC1 1 LL ILLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLIL eec 1 LLL LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLILIILIILA Q Z Z b E Brush CHH EXC1 1 93 TR909 CHH 1 EXC1 1 pg Ill 15909 CHH 2 EXC 1 TR808 CHH 1 EXC1 1 c7loo TR808 CHH 2 EXCi 1 BE RS OHH 1 EXC1 1 98 RS OHH 2 EXC1 1 EB Rs OHH 3 EXCi 1 100 Standard OHH EXC1 1 101 Brush OHH EXC1 dle 000 dm RR eee RO 15909 OHH EXC1 1 103 TR808 OHH EXC1 1 RO Rs PHH EXCH 3d ae rm 105 Jazz PHH EXC1 1 E Brush PHH EXC1 1 107 TR909 PHH EXC1 2 i dee EXC Percussion sound of the same number will not be heard at the same time PC Program Number Rh11 MSB 086 LSB 064 Rh12 Rh15 MSB 120 LSB 000 118 Rh16 GM2 ANALOG PC 026 Rh17 GM2 JAZZ Rh18 GM2 BRUSH Rhythm set list Rh19 GM2 ORCHSTRA Rh20 GM2 SFX Voice PC 033 Voice PC 041 Voice _ PC 049 Voice PC 057 Voice 26
40. This can be the cause of malfunction such as keys ceasing to produce sound Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a cloth impregnated with a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Repairs and Data Please be aware that all data contained in the unit s memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs Important data should always be backed up in another MIDI device e g a sequencer or written down on paper when possible During repairs due care is taken to avoid the loss of data However in certain cases such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Additional Precautions Never turn off the power while the display indicates KEEP POWER ON If you turn off the power while this message is displayed the internal user data will be lost Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data we recommend that you periodically sav
41. Use VALUE to select a rhythm set bh ON Press ENTER to play back the rhythm pattern 36 Using the Rhythm Guide Switching sounds i o LE PATCH MODIFY Play the rhythm pattern Press PART SELECT so it is lit Press 0 so it is lit to select a rhythm set Use VALUE to select the rhythm set that you want to use with the rhythm pattern Change the tempo S PATCH MODIFY When you have selected a rhythm pattern you can specify the tempo Press TAP TEMPO so it is lit The current tempo of the pattern will be displayed MEMO BPM stands for Beats Per Minute and indicates the Use VALUE to adjust the tempo number of quarter notes Press EXIT to return to the previous screen that occur in one minute Pressing a button to modify the tempo Tap Tempo You can modify the tempo by the rate at which you press TAP TEMPO At quarter note beats press TAP TEMPO three or more times at the desired tempo The tempo will be calculated automatically and set to the interval at which you pressed the button The button lets you check the tempo and time signature During the playback of the rhythm pattern the button will blink in red on the first beat of each measure and in green on subsequent beats 37 38
42. boosts the region near the cutoff frequency to add a distinctive character to the sound T S x KS 5 S VOLUME PATCH MODIFY PHRASE SE 1 Turn the CUTOFF knob Turning this to the right clockwise brightens the sound while turning it to the left counterclockwise makes the sound seem darker 2 Turn the RESONANCE knob Turning this to the right makes the sound more distinctive while turning it to the left reduces these characteristics Using a lever to modify the sound E Changing the sound s pitch in real time Pitch Bend Lever While playing the keyboard move the lever to the left to lower the pitch or to the right to raise the pitch NEM Independently for each patch you can specify whether the effect is to be Pitch Bend applied to the upper or the You can set up to a two octave pitch bend range adjustable in semitones For further information refer to Pitch Bend Range p 47 lower tone p 46 E Adding a vibrato effect to the sound Modulation Lever While playing the keyboard move the lever away from you to add a vibrato effect Pal Modulation When you want to use the Modulation Lever to add effects other than vibrato refer to Mod Modulation Assign p 89 29 Applying various effects to the sound Using a pedal to modify the sound With an external pedal such as an expre
43. call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below EGYPT A Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street ARD E1 Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 20 2 417 1828 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA That Other Music Shop PTY Ltd 11 Melle St Braamfontein Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA P O Box 32918 Braamfontein 2017 Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 403 4105 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd 17 Werdmuller Centre Main Road Claremont 7708 SOUTH AFRICA P O BOX 23032 Claremont 7735 SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 674 4030 CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai 200090 CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd BEIJING OFFICE 10F No 18 Anhuaxili Chaoyang District Beijing 100011 CHINA TEL 010 6426 5050 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd GUANGZHOU OFFICE 2 F No 30 Si You Nan Er Jie Yi Xiang Wu Yang Xin Cheng Guangzhou 510600 CHINA Tel 020 8736 0428 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Division 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 Parsons Music Ltd 8th Floor Railway Plaza 39 Chatham Road South T S T Kowloon HONG KONG TEL 2333 1863 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 409
44. effects in which the sound changes instantaneously in a way that would not be possible by operating a knob or the bender lever D BEAM ASSIGNABLE 1 Press SOLO SYNTH ACTIVE EXPRESS or ASSIGNABLE so it is lit If you select ASSIGNABLE the function assigned to the D Beam controller will appear in the display Applying various effects to the sound 2 3 While playing the keyboard to produce sound place your hand over the D Beam and slowly move it up and down An effect will be applied to the sound depending on the function that is assigned to the D Beam controller To turn off the D Beam controller press the button once again to turn it off The usable range of the D Beam controller The following diagram shows the usable range of the D Beam controller Waving your hand outside this range will produce no effect Either SOLO SYNTH ACTIVE EXPRESS or ASSIGNABLE will blink while the D Beam controller is responding When your hand leaves the usable range of the D Beam controller the button will stop blinking and will remain lit The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change depending Bb on the amount of light in the vicinity of the unit If it does not function as you expect adjust the sensitivity as appropriate for the brightness of your location p 34 Also the usable range of the D Beam controller will be considerably reduced when used under strong direct s
45. lated like a square wave SIN The sound will be modulat ed like a sine wave SAW1 2 The sound will be modulated like a sawtooth wave The teeth in SAW1 and SAW2 point at opposite direc tions SAW1 SAW2 Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the frequency speed of note 2 the change Depth 0 127 Sets the depth to which the ef fect is applied Adding effects Parameter Value Description Reset OFF ON This setting determines whether the period for the pattern is reset ON or not OFF when sounds are played While the rhythm guide is play ing the period for the pattern is not reset even if you set this ON LEVEL RESET Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 46 TUMBLING DLY Tumbling Delay This is a delay that first produces tumbling delayed repeats and then echoes the original sound It is most effective when applied to single notes of a one shot sound Lin 9 Balance D Balance W O O 4 Tumbling Delay a CT Balance W Feedback Rin O Balance D Parameter Value Description Type TYPE1 TYPE6 Selects one of the six available types for the number of delay sounds heard in time A in the diagram below Pre Delay 0 500 ms Adjusts
46. sound is fed back into the effect NORMAL The left delay sound will be fed back into the left de lay and the right delay sound into the right delay CROSS The left delay sound will be fed back into the right de lay and the right delay sound into the left delay Delay Left 0 420 ms note 1 Adjusts the time from the direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay Right 0 420 ms note 1 Adjusts the time from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard Phase Left NORMAL INVERT Selects the phase of the left delay sound NORMAL Phase is not changed INVERT Phase is inverted Phase Right NORMAL INVERT Selects the phase of the right de lay sound NORMAL Phase is not changed INVERT Phase is inverted Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Adding effects Parameter Value Description HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feed back set this parameter to BY PASS Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adj
47. 1 TR909 Clap 2 1 TR909 Clap 1 1 TR909 Clap 1 1 Church Bell 1 CEO Cheap Clap 1 TR808 Clap 1 TR808 Clap 1 TR808 Clap 1 FingerSnap 1 91 Bass Hit 2 Bass Hit 2 Bass Hit 2 Bass Hit 2 TR909 Clap 2 1 92 OrchestraHit 2 OrchestraHit 2 OrchestraHit 2 OrchestraHit 2 TR808 Clap 1 93 6th Hit 2 6th Hit 2 6th Hit 2 6th Hit 2 OrchestraHit 2 GEM Euro Hit 2 Euro Hit 2 Applause 2 Applause 2 Applause 2 Mtrnm Click 1 Mtrnm Click 1 Mtrnm Click 1 Mtrnm Click 1 Mtrnm Click 1 c7l96 Mtrnm Bell 1 Mtrnm Bell 1 Mtrnm Bell 1 Mtrnm Bell 1 Mtrnm Bell 1 a E i 116 EXC Percussion sound of the same number will not be heard at the same time PC Program Number Rh01 Rh05 MSB 086 LSB 064 Rh06 R amp B HHop Kit PC 006 Rh07 Techno Kit Voice PC 007 Rhythm set list Rh08 House Kit Voice PC 008 Voice Rh09 808 amp 909 Kit PC 009 Voice Rh10 Perc Menu PC 010 Voice EE Dry Snr 2 1 Elec Snare 2 2 R amp B Snr2 2 House Snr 1 Mtrnm Click 1 28 Sharp Kick 2 PlasticKickt 2 Old Kick 2 House Kick 2 Mtrnm Bell 1 29 Old Kick 2 House Kick 2 House Kick 2 SH32 Kick 2 Scratch 1 1 CEO Jazz Rim 1 Elec Snare 1 1 TR808 Snr2 1 Elec Snare 2 2 Scratch 2 1 31 TR909 Kick 2 1 SH32 Kick 2 SH32 Kick 2 PlasticKick1 2 Scratch Push EXC1 1 E RS Jazz Snr 1 Finger Snr 1 Elec Snare 3 1 Elec Snare 3 1 Scratch Pull EXC1
48. 2 SINGLE 277 Or75 Flute FLT 68 21 0 74 SINGLE 337 Br1 JP Saw Brs SBR ee Teo 4 DUAL 278 Or76 Recorder FLT 68 22 0 75 SINGLE 388 Br32 OB Brass SBR 6 Tal TI 5 DUAL 279 Or77 Pan Flute FLT 68 23 0 76 SINGLE 339 Br33 LA Brass SBR 6 s 4 SINGLE 280 Or78 Bottle Blow FLT 68 24 0 77 2 SINGLE 340 Br34 BPF Brass SBR 6 4 DUAL 281 Or79 Whistle FLT 68 26 0 79 2 SINGLE 341 Br35 Dist SqrBrs SBR 6e 837 2 SINGLE 282 Or80 Ocarina FLT 68 27 0 80 2 SINGLE 342 Br36 Soaring Horn SBR 6 s8 4 SINGLE 283 Orsi Fiddle STR 68 73 0 ai SINGLE 345 Br37 RSTrumpet1 BRS 6 9 SINGLE 344 Br38 RS Trumpet2 BRS 6 9 SINGLE 345 Br39 Bright Tp BRS EE EES 2 SINGLE 5 WORLD 346 Brit Flugel Horn BRS 6 2 SINGLE 347 Br l Dual Tp BRS 6 3 TI 2 SINGLE No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2Patch Select Voice Key 348 Bra2 MuteTrumpt 1 BRS 65 94 a SINGLE gory MSB 87 MSB 121 Mode 349 Br43 MuteTrumpt2 BRS 6 ls SINGLE ESB AP Giu ESB Pe 350 Br44 RSTb1 BRS 6 SINGLE 284 WO1 RS Sitar 1 PK 6 43 SINGLE SI mus nS T3 SRS e a a SINGLE 285 Wr02 RSSitar2 PER pueri pe 2 SINGLE nord Bde RSS BRS Statt SINGLE 286 W03 RSShamisen ETH 65 45 2 SINGLE 353 ay RSEHom SRS SES SINGLE 287 Wr04 RS Kalimba gH 6 4 SINGLE Sor Ben RS
49. 22 Rhythm Set Parameters 127 7e 52 Rhythm Set Utility En 53 Rhythm Sets hende tein sas 40 Rhythm Tone Parameters 52 RS Editot inane temas 99 Rx Bank Sel Receive Bank Select Switch 90 Rx Prog Chg Receive Program Change Switch 90 Rx Sys Exc Receive System Exclusive Switch 90 S Save Patch iier rte eee e ters 48 Pertormarice eni ee 59 SCALE TUNE eigene Atel matins 58 Scale Tune Part Setup Parameters sss 57 Send Eyl to Cho ene aenea 69 Send Lvl to Rev Chorus Parameters ENEE 87 Multi Effects Parameters EE 69 Shuf Rate Arpeggio Shuffle Rate nn 63 Shuf Resolution Arpeggio Shuffle Resolution 63 Soft Thru Soft Through Switch eene 91 SOlOQWiteh EE 46 SOLO SYN TH nente un aee 32 Split EE 46 elt E 45 Style Arpeggio Style sess 62 Sustain level cote nee a ette 28 System Function repete eb iet 88 System messages En 93 System Parameters pernos pie nnee ar nak 89 T Tap TEMPO 2 eee ener canes 37 Jitfne ocupa entres EE 87 Tone Balance eei ete e etn eite etas 45 Tone Pariaciiinnie deese ede erint ina 46 TONES cease n rh d e ena en res 40 REES 31 Tune C B Part Scale Tune C B s 58 Tune C Tune B Patch Scale Tune C B 91 Tx Active Sens Transmit Active Sensing Switch 91 Tx Bank Sel Transmit Bank Select Switch 90 Tx Edit Data Transmit Edit D
50. 4 G4 A A4 E5 Ast Bb 7 A32 GIG C 4 F4 Adt ES A4 F5 B Bdim7 B2 G 3 D4 F4 B SS B4 F 5 12 Jazz Min 2 16 Scale Set Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of Key Chord Forms C C3 D 4 G4 C5 Ci Db C 3 C 4 F4 G 4 D Ddim D3 D4 F4 G 4 D Eaug D 3 D 4 G4 B4 E E E3 E4 G4 B4 F F F2 C4 F4 G 4 F Gbdim7 F 2 C4 D 4 A4 G G G2 B3 D4 G4 G Ab G 2 G 4 D 4 C4 A A 7 b5 A2 C4 D 4 G4 A Bb A 2 D4 F4 A 4 B Bdim B2 D4 F4 B4 9 Pop Min 1 Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of Key Chord Forms rai C add9 C3 D4 D 4 G4 CK Donat C 3 G 3 C4 F4 D D 7 b5 D3 C4 F4 G 4 D Ebmaj7 D 3 A 3 D4 G4 E Edim7 E3 A 3 C 4 G4 F F 7 9 F2 G 3 D 4 G4 F Gbdim7 F 2 A3 C4 D 4 G G7 G2 A 3 D4 F4 G Abmaj7 G 2 C4 D 4 G4 A A 7 b5 A2 C4 D 4 G4 Ad Bb7sus4 9 13 A42 G 3 C4 D 4 B Bdim7 B2 G 3 D4 F4 10 Pop Min 2 Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of Key Chord Forms Key Chord Forms C C79 C3 D 3 A 3 D4 C Major Scale C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 CH Db7 9 C 3 F3 B3 D 4 C Major Penta C4 D4 E4 G4 A4 D D 7 9 D3 F3 C4 E4 tonic Scale D Eb7 9 D 3 G
51. 4 0432 Whistle 2 0502 Solo Vox 2 0572 Star Theme 2 0363 Lo Brass 2 0433 Ocarina 2 0503 5th Saw Wave 2 0573 Sitar1 1 0364 TP amp TB Sect 2 0434 Square Wavel 2 0504 Bass amp Lead 2 0574 Sitar2 2 0365 Tp Sect 0435 MG Square 0505 Delayed Lead 2 0575 Banjo 1 0366 Tb Sect 0436 2600 Sine 0506 Fantasia 2 0576 Shamisen 1 1 0367 TSax Sect 0437 Sine 0507 Warm Pad 1 0577 Shamisen 2 2 0368 St Sax Sect 2 0438 Twin Sine 0508 Sine Pad 2 0578 Time Vault 4 0369 FatPop Brass 2 0439 Shmoog 0509 Soft Pad 1 0579 Koto 2 0370 Brass sfz 2 0440 Square Wave2 0510 OB2 Pad 1 2 0580 Taisho Koto 2 0371 Synth Brass 2 0441 Dual Sqr amp Saw 0511 OB2 Pad 2 1 0581 Kalimba 1 0372 JP Brass 2 0442 Hollo Lead 0512 Stacked Pad 2 0582 Jublag 1 0373 Oct SynBrs 1 2 0443 OB Lead 0513 FS Hollow 1 2 0583 Bagpipe 2 0374 Jump Brass 1 4 JD Triangle 0514 FS Hollow 2 3 0584 Fiddle 1 0375 Hybrid Brass 2 5 800 Lead 0515 JP8 Sqr Pad 2 0585 Shanai 1 0376 BPF Brass 2 0446 RS Lead 0516 Warm Sqr Pad 3 0586 Tinkle Bell 3 0377 Oct SynBrs 2 2 7 JP8Pls 05 0517 Pipe Pad 3 0587 Agogo 1 0378 Oct SynBrs 3 4 8 JP8Pls 15 0518 Square Pad 3 0588 Steel Drum 1 0379 Synth Brass2 2 9 JP8Pls 30 0519 JP8 Hollow 4 0589 Woodblock 1 0380 SynBrass sfz 2 0450 JP8Pls 45 0520 JP8 Haunting 4 0590 Castanets 1 0381 Velo Brass 1 2 0451 TB Dst Sqr 1 0521 Sugar Key 2 059
52. 63R e Specifying the amount of signal sent to the effect MFX Switch Multi Effects Switch Switches the multi effects on bypass off for each tone VALUE BYPASS ON Chorus Send Lvl Chorus Send Level Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus for each tone VALUE 0 127 Reverb Send Lvl Reverb Send Level Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb for each tone VALUE 0 127 Coarse Tune Adjusts the pitch of the tone s sound up or down in semitone steps 4 octaves VALUE 48 48 Creating a patch Patch mode Fine Tune Adjusts the pitch of the tone s sound up or down in one cent steps 50 cents VALUE 50 50 MEMO One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Creating smooth pitch transitions Portamento Portamento is an effect that creates a smooth transition in pitch between one key and the next When the Solo Switch parameter is ON you can apply portamento to create an effect similar to a violinist changing the pitch smoothly by sliding their finger along the fingerboard Portamento Sw Portamento Switch Specifies whether the portamento effect will be applied ON or not OFF VALUE OFF ON Portamento Time When portamento is used this specifies the time over which the pitch will change Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to take more time VALUE 0 127 e Varying the sounds by the force of your keyboard playing The force with which you play a key is expr
53. 909Crash 1 TR909 Clap 2 1 LongWhistle2 EXC10 1 CEA ScratchPush2 EXC8 1 Rev 909 OHH 1 Rev 909 OHH 1 TR808 Clap 1 FingerSnap 1 88 ScratchPull2 EXC8 1 Rev 909Kick2 1 Rev 909Kick2 1 Rev 909Kick2 1 Cheap Clap 1 89 Scratch Push EXC9 1 Rev 909HClap 1 Rev 909HClap 1 Rev 909Crash 1 TR909 Clap 1 1 LC ER Scratch Pull EXC9 1 Beam HO 1 Beam HO 1 Rev 909 OHH 1 TR909 Clap 2 1 91 Scratch 2 1 Techno Hit 1 Techno Hit 1 Rev 909HClap 1 TR808 Clap 2 E Rev 909HClap 1 Bass Hit 2 BassHit 2 Square Click 1 Jingle Bell 1 93 Philly Hit 1 6th Hit 2 6th Hit 2 High Q 1 Bell Tree 1 EEE siren 1 Euro Hit 2 Euro Hit 2 Beam HO 1 W ChimeShort 1 Kei Mtrnm Click 1 MC500 Beep 2 1 MC500 Beep 2 1 MC500 Beep 2 1 WindChimeDwn 1 C796 Mtrnm Bell 1 MC500 Beep 1 1 MC500 Beep 1 1 MC500 Beep 1 1 Church Bell 1 EXC Percussion sound of the same number will not be heard at the same time PC Program Number Rh06 Rh10 MSB 086 LSB 064 117 Appendix Rhythm set list Rh11 Drums Menu PC 011 Rh12 GM2 STANDARD PC 001 Rh13 GM2 ROOM Rh14 GM2 POWER Rh15 GM2 ELECTRIC Voice Voice PC 009 Voice PC 017 Voice PC 025 Voice 21 RS Kick 1 2 gm m m E ns Kick 2 2 23 RS Kick 3 2 c1l24 StandardKick Tse E Rg fi Cea E Jazz Kick 1 1 26 Jazz Kick
54. Channel and Receive Switch for each part p 57 Recording Recording the performance s settings at the beginning of the song First record the Performance settings at the beginning of the song If this is done playing back the song from the beginning will automatically set the RS 50 to the Performance settings that were used during recording regardless of the Performance that was selected when playback began ensuring that playback will use the correct sounds and settings Record the song at the tempo at which it is to be played back If the tempo used for playback of a song is changed from the tempo selected at the time of recording the RS 50 may not be able to correctly receive the settings for the recorded Performance which may prevent proper playback of the performance data 1 In Performance mode press UTILITY so it is lit 2 Use PAGE CURSOR a to select XFER to MIDI 3 Press ENTER Make XFER to MIDI settings as described in Transmitting performance settings from the MIDI OUT connector XFER to MIDI p 61 Select CUR PERFORM for What 4 Put your external sequencer in recording mode before you execute XFER to MIDI 5 Press ENTER to transmit the settings Do not press any key on the keyboard while the transmission is lt 8 KE ES tum oa z Es ie to bal HE in progress Pressing a key sends Note messages from the MIDI OUT connector To canc
55. Depth 0 127 Adjusts the modulation depth of the flanger effect Parameter Value Description Flg Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flg Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the enhancer sound that is sent through the flanger and the enhancer sound that is not sent through the flanger With a setting of D100 0W only the enhancer sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the enhancer sound that is sent through the flanger will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 35 ENH gt DELAY Enhancer Delay This effect connects an enhancer and a delay in series L in Balance D Parameter Description Enhancer Sens Adjusts the sensitivity of the en hancer Enhancer Mix Adjusts the ratio with which the overtones generated by the en hancer are combined with the direct sound Delay Time 0 500 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the delay sound is heard Dly Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the delay input Negative settings will invert the phase Dly HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS Adjusts the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the de
56. Forms C C4 F4 C SS C 4 F 4 D D4 G4 D D 4 G 4 E E4 A4 F F4 A 4 FH F 4 B4 G G4 C5 G G 4 C 5 A mm A4 D5 Adt A 4 D 5 B B4 E5 If you wish to modify the key of each chord set use the Transpose function 123 Appendix MIDI implementation chart SYNTHESIZER Date May 1 2003 Model RS 50 Version 1 00 Function Transmitted Basic Default 1 16 1 16 Channel Changed 1 16 1 16 2 Default Mode 3 Mode 3 Mode Messages X Mode 3 4 M 1 Altered dgio Note 0 127 0 127 Number True Voice FOI II RIK 0 127 l Note On Velocity Note Off After Key s X O Touch Channel s 1 Bank select Modulation Portamento time Data entry Volume Balance Panpot Expression Effect control 1 Effect control 2 Hold 1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Resonance Release time Attack time Cutoff Decay time Vibrato rate Vibrato depth Vibrato delay Portamento control General purpose effects 1 General purpose effects 3 NRPN LSB MSB 1 RPN LSB MSB Program 1 Change True Number MET 0 127 Program No 1 128 uo Song Position Song Select Tune Request Control Change XXOOxXOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 100 101 O O O System Common System Clock Real Time Commands All Sound Off Reset All Controllers Aux Local On Off Messages All Notes Off Active Sens
57. LPF Cuts the frequency range above the cutoff frequency HPF Cuts the frequency range below the cutoff frequency Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the basic frequency of the filter Pre Delay 0 0 100 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the rate of modulation Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of modula tion Phase 0 180 deg Adjusts the spatial spread of the sound Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the amount of the processed sound that is returned fed back into the input Posi tive settings will return the sound in phase and negative settings will return the sound in reverse phase Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency 73 Effects Parameter Value Description D100 0W D0 100W Balance Adjusts the volume balance be tween the direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the flanger sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 16 STEP FLANGER The Step Flanger effect is a flanger in which the flanger pitch changes in steps Balance D H Step Flanger O Balance W Feedback Feedb
58. Mad Org ORG 64 79 2 SINGLE 038 Pf38 RSSt FM EP EP 64 38 2 SINGLE 098 Ky38 Purple B ORG 64 80 2 SINGLE 039 Pf39 Stacked EP EP 64 39 2 SINGLE 099 Ky39 Animal Organ ORG 64 81 SINGLE 040 Pf40 FM Rhodes EP 64 40 2 SINGLE 00 Ky40 Surf Organ ORG 64 82 SINGLE 041 Pf41 Hard FM EP 64 41 2 SINGLE 01 Ky41 Old Organ ORG 64 83 SINGLE 042 Pf42 RS EP amp Vox EP 64 42 4 DUAL 02 Ky42 D 50 Organ ORG 64 84 SINGLE 043 Pf43 Piano 1 PNO 67 1 0 1 2 SPLIT 03 Ky43 House Organ ORG 64 85 SINGLE 044 Pf44 Piano lw PNO 67 2 1 SPLIT 04 Ky44 Garage Organ ORG 64 86 Lg 2 SINGLE 045 Pf45 European Pf PNO 67 3 1 SINGLE 05 Ky45 Club Organ ORG 64 87 2 SINGLE 046 Pf46 Piano2 PNO 67 4 2 SINGLE 06 Ky46 FM Prc Organ ORG 64 88 SINGLE 047 Pf47 Piano 2w PNO 67 5 2 SINGLE 07 Ky47 PipeOrgan Bs ORG 64 89 SPLIT 048 Pf48 Piano3 PNO 67 6 0 3 2 SINGLE 08 Ky48 Vodkakordion ACD 64 90 _ 4 SINGLE 049 Pf49 Piano3w PNO 67 7 3 SINGLE 09 Ky49 Squeeze Me ACD 64 91 4 SINGLE 050 Pf50 Honky tonk PNO 67 8 0 4 2 SINGLE 10 Ky50 Guinguette ACD 64 92 4 SINGLE 051 Pf51 Honky tonk 2 PNO 67 9 4 2 SINGLE 11 Ky51 Harpsichord KE 67 19 0 7 SINGLE 052 Pf52 E Piano 1 EP 67 0 0 5 SINGLE 12 Ky52 Coupled Hps KE 67 20 1 7 2 SINGLE 053 Pf53 St Soft EP EP 67 1 5 SINGLE 13 Ky5
59. Pitch Bend lever Aftertouch These messages indicates how strongly the keyboard was pressed after playing a note There are two types of Aftertouch message Channel Aftertouch which applies to an entire channel and Polyphonic Aftertouch which applies to individual notes The RS 50 cannot transmit Aftertouch messages when its keys are pressed Instead you can do this by transmitting the Aftertouch assigned to the D Beam Modulation lever a pedal or a knob Program Change This message changes the instrument sound You can switch Patches and Rhythm Sets on the RS 50 using program numbers 1 128 p 95 Control Change These are messages used for increasing performance expression By assigning Modulation CC Controller Number 1 Pan CC 10 Expression CC 11 and other Control Change messages to the Modulation lever pedals and knobs you can then use these controls to change Performances p 89 Bank Select CC 0 CC 32 messages are used in combination with Program Change messages to switch Patches and Rhythm Sets p 95 System messages This category includes exclusive messages messages used for synchronization and messages that keep a MIDI system running correctly Exclusive messages Exclusive messages are messages used for exchanging patches and other kinds of data between compatible devices from the same manufacturer If messages exchanged using MIDI were limited only to those that conform to the unive
60. Sets 16 12 chord forms are assigned to each set User Chord Sets 8 12 chord forms can be assigned to each set Phrase Arpeggio Templates 342 User Templates 8 Styles Variations 473 Controllers D Beam Controller 1 Pitch Bend Modulation Lever 1 Control Knobs 5 Display 20 characters 2 lines Backlit LCD Connectors Output Jacks L MONO R Headphones Jack MIDI Connectors IN OUT Hold Pedal Jack Control Pedal Jack Power Supply DC 9 V AC Adaptor Current draw 1 000 mA Dimensions 1 033 W x 294 D x 103 H mm 40 11 16 W x 11 5 8 D x 4 1 16 H inches Weight 5 5 kg 12 Ibs 3 oz excluding AC adaptor Accessories Owner s Manual AC Adaptor ACI Series or PSB 1U CD ROM Editor program for PC Mac Options Pedal Switch DP 2 DP 8 Foot Switch BOSS FS 5U Expression Pedal EV 5 In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or Appendix appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice 125 A Accent Rate Arpeggio Accent Rate 63 Active Exp Sw Active Expression Switch 46 ACTIVE EXPRESS Active Expression 32 Adftertouel iion ema diete edicit 93 ArpeggiatOr E 23 62 Arpeggio Accent Rate ee 63 Arpeggio Hold Switch sss 63 Arpeggio Key Trigger ee 63 Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity sss 63 Arpeggio Motif en 62 Arpeggio Octave Range
61. Tom 1 TR808 Tom 1 Timbale Hi 1 1 CBR Gap Ride 1 TR909 Ride 1 1 TR909 Ride 2 1 TR909 Ride 3 1 Timbale Lw 1 1 52 TR808 Crash 1 ChinaCymbal2 2 ChinaCymbal2 2 TR909 Splash 1 Timbale Hi 2 1 53 TR909RideBl1 1 TR909RideBI2 1 TR909RideBl1 1 TR909RideBl2 1 Timbale Lw 2 1 LEE Tambourine 1 1 Tambourine 2 1 Tambourine 3 1 TR808Conga 1 1 Cuica Mute EXC5 1 55 TR909 Splash 1 NoiseCymbal 1 TR909 Splash 1 TR909 Splash 1 Cuica Open EXC5 1 E TR808Cowbell 1 TR808Cowbell 1 Cowbell 1 TR808Cowbell 1 Cuica Sw 1 57 TR909 Crash 1 TR808 Crash 1 TR808 Crash 1 TR808 Crash 1 Castanets 1 CR Vibrasiap 1 Vibraslap 1 Vibraslap 1 TR909 PHH EXC1 2 Castanets 2 2 22 TR909 Ride 2 1 TR909 Ride 3 1 TR909 Ride 3 1 TR909 Kick 1 1 Tambourine 1 1 caleo Bongo High 2 1 Bongo High 2 1 Bongo High 2 1 TR909 Kick 2 1 Tambourine 2 1 DR Bongo Low 1 Bongo Low 2 1 Bongo Low 2 1 TR909 Rim 1 Tambourine 3 1 62 Conga Hi Mt2 EXC2 1 TR808Conga 1 1 Conga Hi Mt2 EXC2 1 TR909 Snr 1 1 Cabasa 1 E CongHiOp Sip EXC2 1 CongHiOp Sip 1 CongHiOp Sip EXC2 1 TR909 Clap 2 1 Maracas 1 64 CongLwOp Slp 1 CongLwOp Slp 1 CongLwOp Slp 1 TR909 Snr 2 1 TR808Maracas 1 65 Timbale Hi 2 1 Timbale Hi 2 1 Timbale Hi 2 1 TR909 Tom 1 Claves 1 LES Timbale Lw 2 1 Timbale Lw 2 1 Timbale Lw 2 1 TR909 CHH 1 EXC1 1 TR808 Clave 1 67 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 TR909 Tom 1 Woodblock 1 EEE Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 TR909 CHH 2 EXC1 1 Woodblock 1 69 Cabasa 1
62. but steadier pitch Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift A in semitone steps 2 1 oc taves Adjusts the pitch of Pitch Shift B in semitone steps 2 1 oc taves Makes fine adjustments to the pitch of Pitch Shift A in 2 cent steps 100 100 cents One cent is 1 100th of a semi tone Makes fine adjustments to the pitch of Pitch Shift B in 2 cent steps 100 100 cents One cent is 1 100th of a semi tone Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift A sound is heard Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift A sound is heard Adjusts the stereo location of the Pitch Shift A sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Adjusts the stereo location of the Pitch Shift B sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Coarse A 1 24 12 semi Coarse B 2 24 12 semi Fine A 1 100 100 cent Fine B 2 100 100 cent Pre Delay A 0 500 ms Pre Delay B 0 500 ms PanA L64 63R Pan B L64 63R 77 Effects Parameter Value Description Level Balance A100 0B Adjusts the volume balance be A0 100B tween the Pitch Shift A and Pitch Shift B sounds Balance D100 0W Adjusts the volume balance be D0 100W tween the direct sound and the pitch shift sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be out
63. can damage connected audio devices your hearing or annoy your neighbors 15 Getting ready Turning off the power 1 Before you turn off the power make sure of the following points e Are the volume controls of the RS 50 and the other connected equipment turned to the minimum position Have you saved the sounds or other data you ve created p 48 p 53 p 59 2 Turnoff the power for all connected audio devices 3 Turn off the RS 50 s power switch Adjusting the display contrast LCD CONTRAST The characters in the display may be difficult to view immediately after turning on the power or after extended use this may also be because of where and how the display is situated Follow the steps below to adjust the display s contrast PATCH MODIFY 1 Press SYSTEM so it is lit 2 UsePAGE CURSOR to select LCD Contrast MEMO The LCD CONTRAST setting is saved automatically and is 3 UseVALUE 4 to set the value 1 10 deux evon winie the power is off 16 Reset to default factory settings Factory Reset This restores all data in the RS 50 to the factory set condition Factory Reset Be sure not to turn off the power while Factory Reset is being performed If the power is turned off o
64. characters and use VALUE to finalize the desired character space A Z a z 0 9 1 76 amp lt gt e II Value US Assigning a name p 43 Category Changes the category of the patch Selecting a patch by category p 20 Key Mode Specifies how the two tones will be sounded when you play the keyboard The indication in the display is linked to the KEY MODE setting of the panel p 44 VALUE SINGLE The upper tone is played by all keys on the keyboard SPLIT The keyboard will be split the lower range plays the lower tone and the upper range plays the upper tone Youcan change the point at which the lower and upper tones are divided p 45 DUAL The upper and lower tones are layered US Changing the way that the tones are sounded Key Mode p 44 Patch Level Specifies the volume of the patch VALUE 0 127 Tone Balance Adjusts the volume balance of LOWER and UPPER This is linked with the operation of the BALANCE knob of the panel p 26 VALUE 64 LOWER 63 UPPER Split Point When Key Mode p 45 is set to SPLIT this specifies the transition point between the upper and lower tones VALUE A0 C8 45 Patch Mode Creating a patch Patch mode Split Arp When Key Mode p 45 is set to SPLIT this specifies which tone will be affected by the arpeggiator VALUE UPPER The upper tone will be played by the arpeggiator LOWER The
65. data stored in the user area will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector When the display indicates COMPLETED the transmission operation has been completed Nem If you want to restore the stored data into the RS 50 once again send the data to the RS 50 s MIDI IN Do not operate the RS 50 while this data is being received Restoring the factory settings FACTORY RESET You can also perform the FACTORY RESET operation from Patch Utility For more about FACTORY RESET refer to Reset to default factory settings Factory Reset p 17 Patch Mode 51 Creating a rhythm set Patch mode The RS 50 provides rhythm sets that are suitable for a variety of musical genres You can edit a preset rhythm set to modify the pitch volume panning of each percussion instrument sound to your liking and save it as a user rhythm set How to make the rhythm set settings A rhythm set consists of the following types of settings e Settings used by the entire rhythm set Rhythm Common e Settings for each rhythm tone key Rhythm Tone Collectively these are referred to as rhythm set parameters Editing the rhythm set parameters 1 Press PATCH so it is lit and you are in Patch mode 2 Select a rhythm set p 22 3 Press PARAM so it is lit Now you can edit the rhythm set parameters Use PAGE CURSOR a gt to select the parameter that you want to edit 4 If there is an edi
66. eae e See CEA High a 1 High Q 1 High Q 1 Close HiHat EXC1 1 28 Slap 1 Slap 1 Slap 1 Standard PHH EXC1 1 29 Scratch Push EXC7 1 Scratch Push EXC7 1 Scratch Push EXC7 1 Standard OHH EXC1 1 EE Scratch Pull EXC7 1 Scratch Pull EXC7 1 Scratch Pull EXC7 1 Ride Cymbal 1 31 Sticks 1 Sticks 1 Sticks 1 Sticks 1 ER Square Click 1 Square Click 1 Square Click 1 Square Click 1 33 Mtrnm Click 1 Mmmm Click 1 Mtrnm Click 1 Mtrnm Click 1 EM tnm Belt 1 Mtrnm Bell 1 Mtrnm Bell 1 Mtrnm Bell 1 ES Mix Kick 1 Jazz Kick 2 2 Jazz Kick 2 2 Concert BD 1 C236 TR808 Kick 1 1 Jazz Kick 1 1 Jazz Kick 1 1 ConcertBD Mt 1 ES TR808 Rim 1 Side Stick 1 Side Stick 1 Side Stick 1 38 TR808 Snr 2 1 Jazz Snr 1 BrushSwirl 2 2 Concert Snr 1 IEJ R909 Clap 1 1 TR909 Clap 1 1 Brush Slap 1 1 Castanets 1 1 ao Elec Snare 3 1 Elec Snare 3 1 BrushSwirl 1 1 Concert Snr 1 1 4 TR808 Tom 2 1 Real Tom 3 1 Real Tom 3 1 Timpani 1 Scratch Push EXC7 1 C ER neos CHH 2 EXC1 1 Close HiHat EXC1 1 Brush CHH EXC1 1 Timpani 1 Scratch Pull EXC7 1 43 TR808 Tom 2 1 Real Tom 3 1 Real Tom 3 1 Timpani 1 Sticks 1 M TR808 CHH 1 EXC1 1 Standard PHH EXC1 1 Brush PHH EXC1 1 Timpani 1 Square Click 1 45 TR808 Tom 2 1 Real Tom 2 1 Real Tom 2 1 Timpani 1 Mtrnm Click 1 EB TRe0s OHH EXC1 1 Standard OHH EXC1 1 Brush OHH EXC1 1 Timpani 1 Mtrnm Bell 1 id TR808 Tom 2 1 Real Tom 2 1 Real Tom 2 1 Timpani 1 Gt FretNoise 1 C348 TR
67. heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the rate of modulation Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of modula tion Phase 0 180 deg Adjusts the spatial spread of the sound Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Balance D100 0W Adjusts the volume balance be D0 100W tween the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 14 St CHORUS Stereo Chorus This is a stereo chorus A filter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the chorus sound Balance D Parameter Value Description Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Selects the type of filter OFF A filter will not be used LPF Cuts the frequency range above the cutoff frequency HPF Cuts the frequency range below the cutoff frequency Cutoff Freq 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the basic frequency of the filter Pre Delay 0 0 100 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the rate of modulation ieee M Balance D Parameter Value Description Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Selects the type of filter OFF A filter will not be used
68. however that your unit may incorporate a newer enhanced version of the system e g includes newer sounds so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual Handling CD ROMs Unauthorized duplication reproduction hiring and lending of the software included in the applied CD ROM is prohibited Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside encoded surface of the disc Damaged or dirty CD ROM discs may not be read properly Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Windows is known officially as Microsoft Windows operating system Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc MacOS is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc All product names mentioned in this document are trade marks or registered trademarks of their respective owners IMPORTANT NOTES cusisiiseick cc ge Diss n dadas eeaveuk eege rca sudo ege 4 LEM fL 9 Panel descriptions f idee Eed eege ENEE 10 Erontpanel lte aie i o deti ase ciment biete feste inde Gen ote dit ditate 10 Rear pamela suene abe ai c et EHE HOO nean tete beans dates 13 Getting ready e 14 Reset to default factory settings Factory Reset 17 Listening to the demo songs ceres 18 Quick SIOFE EES d Try out the Sound
69. location between each chorus sound With a setting of 0 all chorus sounds will be in the center With a setting of 20 each chorus sound will be spaced at 60 degree inter vals relative to the center Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 12 TREMOLO CHO Tremolo Chorus Tremolo chorus is a chorus effect with added tremolo cyclic modulation of volume Lin Balance D Balance W CO Tremolo Chorus L out Balance W Rin R out Balance D Parameter Value Description Pre Delay 0 0 100 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard Cho Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the modulation speed of the chorus effect Cho Depth 0 127 Adjusts the modulation depth of the chorus effect Treml Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the modulation speed of the tremolo effect Treml 0 127 Adjusts the spread of the tremo Separation lo effect Phase 0 180 deg Adjusts the spread of the tremo lo effect Balance D100 0W Adjusts the volume balance be D0 100W tween the direct sound and the tremolo chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be
70. lower tone will be played by the arpeggiator BOTH Both the upper and lower tone will be played by the arpeggiator Solo Switch If this setting is turned on only one note will be sounded even if you hold down two or more keys This setting is effective when you want to solo using a patch for a monophonic instrument such as sax or flute VALUE OFF Chords can be played ON The sound will play in solo mode monophonically UPPER Solo mode will be used only for the upper tone LOWER Solo mode will be used only for the lower tone ModulationDst Modulation Destination Specifies the tone that will be affected by modulation p 29 VALUE UPPER Modulation will apply only to the upper tone LOWER Modulation will apply only to the lower tone BOTH Modulation will apply to both the upper and lower tone PitchBend Dst Pitch Bend Destination Specifies the tone that will be affected by pitch bend p 29 VALUE UPPER Pitch bend will apply only to the upper tone LOWER Pitch bend will apply only to the lower tone BOTH Pitch bend will apply to both the upper and lower tone Modify Dest Modify Destination Specifies the tone that will be affected by adjustments to the sound using the panel knobs This is linked with the panel s DESTINATION TONE setting p 26 VALUE UPPER Modification will apply only to the upper tone LOWER Modification will apply only to the lower tone BOTH Modification will a
71. may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada Information When you need repair service
72. nore The Initialize operation applies only to the currently selected sound it will not change the content of sounds stored in user memory If you want to restore all settings to the factory set condition execute the Factory Reset operation p 17 1 Press PATCH so it is lit and you are in Patch mode Select the patch you want to initialize 2 Press UTILITY 3 Use PAGE CURSOR lt to select 2 PATCH INITIALIZE 4 Press ENTER 5 Press ENTER once again to execute When initialization is finished the display will indicate COMPLETED This ends the procedure Erasing a user patch you saved PATCH REMOVE This operation erases the specified user patch When you erase a patch it will no longer be possible to select the patch of that number using direct access buttons If you newly save a patch in that number you will again be able to select it 1 Press PATCH so it is lit and you are in Patch mode 2 Press UTILITY 3 Use PAGE CURSOR lt to select 3 PATCH REMOVE 4 Press ENTER 5 Use VALUE to select the user patch that you want to erase 6 Press ENTER When the data has been erased the display will indicate COMPLETED This ends the procedure Creating a patch Patch mode Transmitting patch rhythm set settings from the MIDI OUT connector XFER to MIDI You can transmit the settings of any patch from the MI
73. one sound simultaneously Performance mode Choosing a part and selecting the sound A performance contains sixteen parts that let you play different sounds simultaneously Here s how to switch parts and assign a patch or rhythm set to each part 1 Press PERFORM so it is lit and you are in Performance mode 2 Press PART SELECT so it is lit and use 0 9 to select a part Press 0 to select part 10 Rhythm To select the parts 11 16 hold down SHIFT and press 1 6 p 43 3 Use VALUE to specify a patch or a rhythm set for the part You can also select a patch using the NUMERIC function Assigning patches of the same category to multiple parts While PART SELECT is lit you can hold down SHIFT and use PAGE CURSOR a to step through the categories assigned to each part selecting patches of the previous or next category group regardless of the button that is selected This lets you assign patches of other categories than printed on the panel to each part For example if you want to prepare multiple patches of the same category such as two types of organ you can use the above method to select organ patches for a category that you do not use Quickly and consecutively auditioning the built in sound of the RS 50 Viewing a list of just the user patches Using the above procedure you can listen consecutively to all the built in sounds of the RS 50 without pressing a category selec
74. output and with a setting of D0 100W only the tremolo chorus sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 13 SPACE D Space D is a multiple chorus that applies two phase modulation in Adding effects stereo It gives no impression of modulation but produces a transparent chorus effect Balance D Parameter Value Description Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of modula tion Phase 0 180 deg Adjusts the spatial spread of the sound Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Balance D100 0W Adjusts the volume balance be D0 100W tween the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 15 St FLANGER Stereo Flanger This is a stereo flanger It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls like a jet airplane taking off or landing A filter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the flanged sound Balance D Cole O Balance W Feedback Feedback Fener 4 Lin CT Balance W Parameter Value Description Pre Delay 0 0 100 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is
75. please be aware of this when you save patches PARTIM c If the same patch happens to be selected in both Patch mode PART 12 MUS and Performance mode and you save the patch in one mode PART 15 Ch 13 and then switch modes the patch will still sound in accord with PART 14 Ch 14 the settings prior to the save However once you re select the PART 15 Ch 15 patch or the performance again the patch will then sound in PART 16 Ch 16 accord with the newly saved settings Receive Sw Receive Switch Normally you will leave this ON If you want to use an external sound module to play a certain part you can turn this OFF to mute the internal sound generator for that part Value OFF ON MEMD The RS 50 s keyboard will not play internal sound generator parts whose Receive Switch is turned OFF Receive Prg Chg Receive Program Change Switch For each part specify whether MIDI Program Change messages will be received ON or not OFF Value OFF ON o o oO E G E s o n Receive Bank Sel Receive Bank Select Switch For each part specify whether MIDI Bank Select messages will be received ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Scale Tune You can specify a different tuning Scale Tune setting for each part Press ENTER to access the Scale Tune setting screen For details refer to Editing the scale tune settings SCALE TUNE p 58 US If you want to edit t
76. referenced as values from 0 to 127 find the appropriate number by subtracting 1 from the number in the following correspondence chart When the RS 50 receives a Program Change message without receiving the Bank Select it switches to the patch or rhythm set with the same Bank number as the currently selected patch or rhythm set E For details on how numbers in the table correspond to the sound of the RS 50 refer to Patch list p 111 Performance Group Number Bank Number Program MSB LSB Number User 001 008 085 000 001 008 Preset 001 032 085 064 001 032 Patch Group Number Bank Number Program MSB LSB Number User 001 128 087 000 001 128 Preset 001 128 087 064 001 128 129 256 087 065 001 128 257 384 087 066 001 128 385 512 087 067 001 128 513 640 087 068 001 128 GM Patch 001 256 121 000 001 128 95 lt 8 O S E 2 oa ESS Es So D z Performing with an external MIDI device Rhythm Set Group Number Bank Number Program MSB LSB Number User 001 002 086 000 001 002 Preset 001 020 086 064 001 020 GM Rhythm 001 009 120 000 001 057 Using an external MIDI controller to change the RS 50 s tones Use of the Modulation lever pedals and control knobs to make changes to the RS 50 s tones in real time is explained in Settings related to controllers CONTROLLER p 89 Transmitting
77. sets the way in which delays repeat Higher values result in more delay repeats Value 0 127 87 Effects Settings common to all modes System Function Settings that affect the entire operating environment of the RS 50 such as tuning and MIDI message reception are referred to as system functions This section explains how to make settings for the System functions and describes the functions of the different System parameters The parameters are organized into the following six groups GENERAL Make settings common to the entire system p 89 CONTROLLER Make controller related settings p 89 e MIDI Make MIDI related settings p 90 PATCH SCALE Patch Scale Tune Make scale tune settings for a patch p 91 How to make the system function settings 1 Press SYSTEM so it is lit 2 Select the parameter that you want to edit US Selecting system setting parameters p 88 3 Use VALUE to modify the value 4 Repeat steps 2 3 to make the settings for the System function yon Changes you make to the system function settings are temporary and will be lost when you turn off the power If you want to save the settings you modified perform the following operation 5 To save the settings you modified press WRITE 6 Press ENTER to execute von When you save system settings the previously saved settings will be overwritten and lost If you decide not to sa
78. single key You can register different chord forms to each key and recall multiple chords together Several sets of chord progressions that typically appear in one song have been registered as presets Compact and easy to carry The RS 50 is compact light and easy to carry It s an instrument with great sounds and professional level functionality that can be easily carried between your bedroom and the stage or studio Dedicated sound editor is included The dedicated sound editing program RS Editor Mac and Windows versions on a hybrid CD ROM is included allowing you to use your computer to create and rearrange sounds quickly and easily D Beam controller The D Beam controller gives you control over a variety of effects simply by moving your hand In conjunction with the visual element this can be a powerfully impressive addition to a live performance Rhythm Guide function As an alternative to the metronome you can use more realistic rhythm patterns as enjoyable backing for your playing General MIDI General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices Sound generating devices and music files that meet the General MIDI standard bear the General MIDI logo inia Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to
79. sounds User Patch Saving an edited patch in the appropriate category will make it easier for you to find the patch when needed This will also let you use arpeggiator settings that are appropriate for your user patch Category Category Category Contents Group PIANO Pf PNO ACPIANO EP EL PIANO Acoustic Piano Electric Piano KBD amp KEY KEYBOARDS Other Keyboards ORGAN Clav Harpsichord etc Ky BEL BELL Bell Bell Pad MLT MALLET Mallet ORG ORGAN Electric and Church Or gan ACD ACCORDION Accordion HRM HARMONICA GUITAR AGT AC GUITAR Harmonica Blues Harp Acoustic Guitar Gt EGT EL GUITAR Electric Guitar DGT DIST GUITAR Distortion Guitar ORCH Oc STR STRINGS Strings ORC ORCHESTRA HIT HIT amp STAB Orchestra Ensemble Orchestra Hit Hit WND WIND Winds Oboe Clarinet etc FLT FLUTE Flute Piccolo WORLD PLK PLUCKED Plucked Harp etc Wr ETH ETHNIC Other Ethnic FRT FRETTED Fretted Inst Mandolin etc BRASS Br BRS AC BRASS Acoustic Brass SBR SYNTH BRASS Synth Brass SAX SAX Sax VOCAL amp BPD BRIGHT PAD Bright Pad Synth PAD Vo SPD SOFTPAD Soft Pad Synth VOX VOX Vox Choir SYNTH HLD HARDLEAD Hard Synth Lead Sy SLD SOFT LEAD Soft Synth Lead TEK TECHNO SYNTH Techno Synth PLS PULSATING Pulsating Synth FX SYNTH FX Synth FX Noise etc SYN OTHERSYNTH Poly Synth BASS Bs BS BASS Acous
80. stored in the user area 1 Press PERFORM so it is lit and you are in Performance mode Select the performance you want to output 2 Press UTILITY 3 Use PAGE CURSOR a to select 3 XFER to MIDI 4 Press ENTER Transmitting the settings of currently selected performance This operation lets you transmit the settings of the current edited and unsaved performance 5 Use VALUE to select CUR PERFORM 6 Press ENTER The currently selected performance settings will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector When the display indicates COMPLETED the transmission has been completed Transmitting the settings of a user performance 5 Use VALUE to select USER PERFORM 6 Press PAGE CURSOR Specify the range of performances whose settings you want to transmit Use VALUE to specify the first performance of the range of performances you want to transmit 7 Press PAGE CURSOR Use VALUE to specify the last performance of the range of performances you want to transmit 8 Press ENTER The performance settings of the specified range will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector When the display indicates COMPLETED the transmission operation has been completed Transmitting all data stored in the user area 5 Use VALUE to select DUMP ALL 6 Pres
81. the song won t be played back correctly Performing with a computer If you are using music software running on a computer you can use the computer to operate the RS 50 s controls Not only can you create and play back song data you can also have Tones switch automatically What s more you can use the included RS Editor software to create Tones using the computer Connecting with MIDI cables A MIDI interface is required for making MIDI connections with a computer The MIDI interface is connected to the computer and two MIDI cables connect the MIDI connectors of the MIDI interface to the RS 50 s MIDI connectors RS 50 rear panel MIDI Interface i Ga tt t t MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI cable Installing the included editor software To help you get more out of your RS 50 it comes with RS Editor software Use RS Editor to freely create your own original sounds Detailed instructions on installing the software can be found in the online manual contained on the RS Editor CD ROM es Windows users In the RS Editor CD ROM open the Readme F txt Macintosh users In the RS Editor CD ROM open the ReadMe English 99 n ES bei E E E bel MI 0 a x o g EJ a E o 3 100 Appendix Troubleshooting If your system is not operating as you think it should be first check the following points If after checking these points the problem persists consult your dealer or l
82. to the highest key that was pressed PHRASE Pressing a single key will sound a phrase based on the pitch of that key If multiple keys are pressed the last pressed key will be valid Using the phrase arpeggio function Ka For a phrase template this setting will be PHRASE Accent Rate Arpeggio Accent Rate Modifies the strength of accents and the length of the notes to adjust the groove feel of the arpeggio A setting of 100 will produce the most pronounced groove feel Value 0 100 Shuf Rate Arpeggio Shuffle Rate This setting lets you modify the note timing to create shuffle rhythms With a setting of 50 the notes will be spaced evenly As the value is increased the note timing will have more of a dotted shuffle feel Value 0 100 Shuffle Rate 50 Shuffle Rate 90 50 50 50 50 90 10 90 10 Shuf Resolution Arpeggio Shuffle Resolution A shuffle feel is produced by delaying the even numbered beats beats 2 4 6 You can select either 16th notes or 8th notes to be affected by this delay Value Hold Arpeggio Hold Switch Switch between Hold On Hold Off for the Arpeggiator performance Value OFF ON Kbd Velocity Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity Specifies the loudness of the notes that you play If you want the velocity value of each note to vary depending on how strongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to REAL If you want each note to have a f
83. 0 Recorder 0490 TranceSaws 2 2 0560 Goblin 2 0630 Burst Noise 2 110 1 PIANO 2 KBD amp ORG No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2Patch Select Voice Key No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2 Patch Select Voice Key gory MSB 87 MSB 121 Mode gory MSB 87 MSB 121 Mode LSB PC LSB PC LSB PC LSB PC 001 Pf01 RS Grand PNO 64 1 2 SPLIT 061 Ky01 RS Clavi 1 KE 64 43 1 SINGLE 002 Pf02 RS Grand 2 PNO 64 2 2 SINGLE 062 Ky02 RSClavi2 KE 64 44 2 SINGLE 003 Pf03 Bright Grand PNO 64 3 2 SINGLE 063 Ky03 RS Clavi 3 KE 64 45 1 SINGLE 004 Pf04 Mono Piano PNO 64 4 SINGLE 064 Ky04 RS Clavi 4 KE 64 46 1 SINGLE 005 Pf05 Rock Piano 1 PNO 64 5 2 SINGLE 065 Ky05 Phaser Clav KE 64 47 1 SINGLE 006 Pf06 Rock Piano 2 PNO 64 6 2 SINGLE 066 Ky06 AnalogClav 1 KE 64 48 1 SINGLE 007 Pf07 Dance Piano PNO 64 r 2 SINGLE 067 Ky07 AnalogClav 2 KE 64 49 2 SINGLE 008 Pf08 Brite Piano PNO 64 8 SINGLE 068 Ky08 Harpsic
84. 0 Shaku Pad 3 0610 Bubble 2 0401 Blown Tenor 0471 MG Lead 2 0541 RS Combing 4 0611 Bird 1 2 0402 Honky Tenor 0472 Homey Lead 0542 Killer Pad 1 0612 Dog 1 0403 BaritoneSax1 0473 GR500 Lead 0543 LFO Pad 4 0613 Horse Gallop 1 0404 BaritoneSax2 0474 PM Lead 0544 RS RandomPad 3 0614 Bird 2 1 0405 Oboe 1 0475 WindSyn Lead 0545 Ice Rain 2 0615 Telephone 1 1 0406 Oboe2 0476 RS SawLead 2 0546 W Chime Pad 4 0616 Telephone 2 1 0407 EnglishHorn1 0477 MG Lead 3 0547 Saw Impulse 3 0617 DoorCreaking 1 0408 EnglishHorn2 0478 RS SawLead 3 0548 Soundtrack 2 0618 Door 1 0409 Bassoon 1 0479 PureFlatLead 0549 Strobe 4 0619 Scratch 1 0410 Bassoon 2 0480 Air Wave 0550 Riff the 5th 2 0620 Wind Chimes 1 0411 Clarinet 1 0481 Theramax 0551 Star Dust 4 0621 Helicopter 1 0412 Clarinet 2 0482 JP SuperSaw 0552 Sweep Stack 4 0622 Car Engine 1 0413 Piccolo 1 0483 JP8000Detune 0553 Crystal 2 0623 Car Stop 1 0414 Piccolo 2 0484 Velo Cheese 3 0554 Syn Mallet 1 0624 Car Pass 1 0415 Flute 0485 Dance Saws 0555 TarzanBottom 2 0625 Car Crash 2 0416 RS Flute 1 0486 DanceStack 1 3 0556 Atmosphere 2 0626 Siren 1 0417 RS Flute 2 2 0487 DanceStack 2 3 0557 Brightness 2 0627 Train 1 0418 Tron Flute 1 2 0488 TranceSaws 1 3 0558 Bell Sugar 3 0628 Jetplane 2 0419 Tron Flute 2 0489 Trance Keys 3 0559 D 50 Retour 4 0629 Starship 2 042
85. 00 2 SINGLE 223 Or21 OB Strings 1 STR 65 11 2 SINGLE 57 Gt09 AEx BeyondGt AGT 64 01 6 DUAL 224 Or22 OB Strings 2 STR 65 12 5 DUAL 58 Gt10 RS Strat 1 EGT 64 02 SINGLE 225 Or23 SawStrings 1 STR 65 13 2 SINGLE 59 Gtl1 RS Strat 2 EGT 64 03 SINGLE 226 Or24 SawStrings 2 STR 65 14 6 DUAL 60 Gt12 StStrat Gtr EGT 64 04 2 SINGLE 227 Or25 JUNO Strings STR 65 15 2 SINGLE 61 Gt13 12str E Gtr EGT 64 05 2 SINGLE 228 Or26 AEx Orchstra STR 65 16 6 DUAL 62 Gtl4 RS Jazz Gtr EGT 64 06 SINGLE 229 Or27 RS Violin 1 STR 65 17 2 DUAL 63 Gt15 E Guitar EGT 64 07 SINGLE 230 Or28 RS Violin 2 STR 65 18 2 SINGLE 64 Gtl6 Funk Gtr EGT 64 08 SINGLE 231 Or29 Violin Marc STR 65 19 SINGLE 65 Gt17 Wah Guitar EGT 64 09 SINGLE 232 Or30 RS Viola STR 65 20 SINGLE 66 Gt18 Wah WahGtr EGT 64 0 SINGLE 233 Or31 RS Cello 1 STR 65 21 3 DUAL 67 Gt19 Darmstrat DGT 64 1 4 DUAL 234 Or32 RS Cello 2 STR 65 22 2 SINGLE 68 Gt20 Dazed Guitar DGT 64 2 2 SINGLE 235 Or33 Cello Spic STR 65 23 SINGLE 69 Gt21 RSOD Guitar DGT 64 3 2 SINGLE 236 Or34 RS Contrabas STR 65 24 SINGLE 70 Gt22 Heavy Gtr DGT 64 4 SINGLE 237 Or35 Trad Pizz STR 65 25 SINGLE 71 Gt23 Dist Mute DGT 64 5 SING
86. 0059 RS Clavi 4 0129 Nylon str Gt 2 0199 House Bs 2 0269 Warm Strings 2 0339 Mute Trumpet 0060 RS Clavi 5 2 0130 Ukulele 0200 Low Bass 2 0270 StSlow Str 2 0340 MuteTrumpet2 0061 RS Clavi 6 0131 Nylon Gt o 2 0201 SH Dullbass 2 0271 Syn Strings1 2 0341 French Horns 0062 AnalogClav 1 0132 Nylon Gt 2 0202 Deep Bass 3 0272 Syn Strings3 2 0342 Fr Horn2 2 0063 AnalogClav 2 2 0133 Spanish Gtr 0203 No Rez 4 You 2 0273 StraightStr 2 0343 RS F Horn 0064 Celesta 0134 Requint Gtr 0204 Square Bass 2 0274 LoFi Strings 2 0344 RS F Horns 1 0065 Glockenspiel 0135 Steel str Gt 0205 Jungle Bass 1 0275 RS Syn Str1 2 0345 RS F Horns 2 0066 Music Box 0136 12str Gtr 1 0206 Organ Bass 1 0276 JP Saws 2 0346 Wide Fr Hrns 2 0067 Vibraphone 0137 Mandolin 0207 Garage Bass 1 0277 Hybrid Str 2 0347 Strings Horn 2 0068 Vibraphone w 0138 Steel Body 0208 SH 2 Bass 2 0278 JUNOFullStr 2 0348 Orch Brass 1 2 0069 RS Vibe 0139 6str Gtr 0209 106Bass 1 0279 Atk Syn Str 2 0349 Orch Brass 2 2 0070 Tr Vibe 0140 St SteelGtr 2 0210 Mini Bs 1 0280 Syn Strings2 2 0350 St Orch Brs1 2 109 Appendix Original tone list
87. 1 QATAR A Emadi Co Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road Aldossary Bldg 1st Floor Alkhobar SAUDI ARABIA P O Box 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 898 2081 SYRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center Khaled Ebn Al Walid St Bldg No 47 P O BOX 13520 Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 223 5384 TURKEY Ant Muzik Aletleri Ithalat Ve Ihracat Ltd Sti Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler Pasaji No 74 20 Taksim Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 2499324 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sherooq Bldg No 14 Grand Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Music Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 604 270 6626 Roland Canada Music Ltd Toronto Office 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL 905 362 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A TEL 323 890 3700 As of November 1 2003 Roland 03237767 03 11 3N
88. 1 Jazz Ride 1 1 Timpani 1 52 ChinaCymbal2 2 ChinaCymbal2 2 ChinaCymbal1 1 ChinaCymbal1 1 Timpani 1 53 Ride Bell 1 1 Rock Ride 2 1 Ride Bell 2 1 Ride Bell 1 1 Timpani 1 LEM Tambourine 1 1 Tambourine 1 1 Tambourine 1 1 Tambourine 3 1 Tambourine 3 1 55 Splash Cym 1 ChinaCymbal2 2 Splash Cym 1 Splash Cym 1 Splash Cym 1 EJ Cowbell 1 Cowbell 1 Cowbell 1 Cowbell 1 ChinaCymbal2 2 57 Rock Crash 2 Rock Crash 2 Crash Cym 2 1 Crash Cym 2 1 ConcertCym 1 1 GEM Vibraslap 1 Vibraslap 1 Vibraslap 1 Vibraslap 1 Rev Cymbl 2 1 Rock Ride 2 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Jazz Ride 2 1 Jazz Ride 2 1 ConcertCym 2 2 C4l60 Bongo High 2 1 Bongo High 2 1 Bongo High 2 1 Bongo High 2 1 SlowAtackCym 1 DR Bongo Low 2 1 Bongo Low 2 1 Bongo Low 2 1 Bongo Low 2 1 SlowAtackCym 1 62 Conga Hi Mt2 EXC2 1 CongaHi Mt2 EXC2 1 Conga Hi Mt2 EXC2 1 Conga Hi Mt2 EXC2 1 Taiko 1 Rl CongHiOp Sip EXC2 1 CongHiOp Sip EXC2 1 CongHiOp Sip EXC2 1 CongHiOp Sip EXC2 1 CongHiOp Slp 1 64 CongLwOp SIp 1 CongLwOp SIp 1 CongLwOp SIp 1 CongLwOp Slp 1 CongLwOp Slp 1 65 Timbale Hi 2 1 Timbale Hi 2 1 Timbale Hi 2 1 Timbale Hi 2 1 Timbale Hi 2 1 LE Timbale Lw 2 1 Timbale Lw 2 1 Timbale Lw 2 1 Timbale Lw 2 1 Timbale Lw 2 1 67 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 EM Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 69 Cabasa 1 Cabasa 1 Cabasa 1 Cabasa 1 Cabasa 1 EM Maracas 1 Maracas 1 Maracas 1 Maracas 1 Maracas 1 ShortWhistle EXC3 1 ShortWhistle EXC3 1 Shor
89. 1 Taiko 1 0382 SoaringHorns 4 0452 TB Det Sqr 2 0522 BriteSaw Key 2 0592 Concert BD 1 0383 Saw Brass 1 4 0453 260 Sub Osc 0523 SuperJupiter 4 0593 Melo Tom 1 1 0384 Saw Brass2 2 0454 Spectrum 0524 Polysynth 2 0594 Melo Tom 2 1 0385 Reso Brass 2 0455 Saw Wave 2 0525 Space Voice 2 0595 Synth Drum 2 0386 DistSqrBrass 2 0456 OB2 Saw 0526 Itopia 2 0596 TR808 Tom 2 0387 JP8000SawBrs 2 0457 Doctor Solo 2 0527 D50 Heaven 1 0597 Elec Perc 1 0388 Velo Brass 2 2 0458 Natural Lead 2 0528 Heaven Pad 2 0598 Reverse Cym 1 0389 Transbrass 2 0459 SequencedSaw 2 0529 Vox Pad 2 0599 Gt FretNoise 1 0390 LA Brass 4 0460 SequencedPls 2 0530 Bowed Glass 3 0600 Gt Cut Noise 1 0391 WarmSynBrass 2 0461 Pattern It 2 0531 Metal Pad 3 0601 String Slap 1 0392 DeepSynBrass 2 0462 FatSaw 2 0532 Halo Pad 2 0602 NylonGtr Nz 1 0393 Spit Brass 2 0463 D 50 FatSaw 2 0533 Sweep Pad 1 0603 Breath Noise 1 0394 Soprano Sax 0464 Waspy Synth 2 0534 LFO Sweep 1 0604 Fl Key Click 1 0395 RS Sop Sax 0465 Naked Cheese 0535 Saws Sweep 3 0605 Seashore 1 0396 Alto Sax 0466 MG Saw 0536 Soft Sweep 2 0606 Rain 1 0397 AltoSax Soft 0467 OB Warm Saw 0537 ForwardSweep 2 0607 Thunder 1 0398 Alto Sax Vel 0468 P5 Saw 0538 ReverseSweep 2 0608 Wind 1 0399 Tenor Sax 0469 RS SawLead 1 0539 Deep Sweep 2 0609 Stream 2 0400 Tenor Sax F 2 0470 MG Lead 1 054
90. 1 33 Technokick 1 2 TR909 Kick 1 1 TR909 Kick 2 1 TR808 Kick 1 1 ScratchPush2 EXC2 1 EN RS PHH EXC1 1 TR909 PHH EXC1 2 TR909 PHH EXC1 2 TR909 PHH EXC1 2 ScratchPull2 EXC2 1 R amp B Kick 2 2 TR909 Kick 2 1 Technokick 1 2 TR808 Kick 2 1 Beam HiQ 1 C236 R amp B Kick 1 2 TechnoKick 1 2 PlasticKick1 2 TR808 Kick 3 1 Taiko 1 JEE pap Stick 3 TR909 Rim 1 Dry Stick 2 2 TR808 Rim 1 Surdo Mute EXC3 1 38 R amp B Snr 1 2 TR909 Snr 1 1 TR909 Snr 3 2 TR808 Snr 1 2 Surdo Open EXC3 1 CERN Cheap Clap 1 TR909 Clap 1 1 TR909 Clap 2 1 TR808 Clap 1 Bongo High 1 1 40 R amp B Snr 2 2 TR909 Snr 2 1 House Snr 1 TR808 Snr 2 1 Bongo Low 1 1 4 R amp B Tom L 1 TR909 Tom 1 TR909 Tom 1 TR808 Tom 2 1 Bongo High 2 1 LEM ORS CHHS EXC1 1 TR909CHH 2 EXC1 1 TR909 CHH 2 EXC1 1 TR808 CHH 1 EXC1 1 BongoLow2 1 43 TR808 Kick 1 1 TR909 Tom 1 TR909 Tom 1 TR808 Tom 1 Conga Hi Mt EXC4 1 ER Rs CHH6 EXC1 1 TR909 CHH 1 EXC1 1 TR909 CHH 1 EXC1 1 TR808 CHH 2 EXC1 1 CongaHi Open EXC4 1 45 R amp B Tom M 1 TR909 Tom 1 TR909 Tom 1 TR808 Tom 2 1 CongaLowOpen 1 mo RS OHH 3 EXC1 1 TR909 OHH EXC1 1 TR909 OHH EXC1 1 TR808 OHH EXC1 1 CongaHi Mt2 EXC4 1 TR808 Kick 1 1 TR909 Tom 1 TR909 Tom 1 TR808 Tom 1 CongHiOp SIp EXC4 1 Cal48 R amp B Tom H 1 TR909 Tom 1 TR909 Tom 1 TR808 Tom 2 1 CongLwOp Slp 1 EM Crash Cym 3 2 TR909 Crash 1 TR909 Crash 1 TR808 Crash 1 TR808Conga 1 1 50 TR808 Kick 1 1 TR909 Tom 1 TR909
91. 2 A3 C4 F4 G G7 b13 G2 F3 B3 D 4 G G G3 D4 G4 B4 G G dim7 G 2 B3 D4 F4 G G 7 13 G 2 F 3 C4 FA Gi G dim7 G 3 D4 F4 B4 A A 9 A2 B3 C4 G4 A A7 b13 A2 G3 C 4 F4 A A A2 E4 A4 C5 Ad C7 on Bb A42 G3 C4 E4 Adt Bb7 13 A42 G 3 D4 G4 Adt Bb A2 D4 F4 A 4 B B 7 b5 B2 A3 D4 F4 B B 7 11 B2 A3 D4 E4 B Bdim B2 D4 F4 B4 122 7 Trad Min 1 11 Jazz Min 1 15 5th Stack hord set list Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of Key Chord Forms C C C3 D 4 G4 C5 Ci Db C 3 C 4 F4 G 4 D Ddim D3 D4 F4 G 4 D Eb D 3 D 4 G4 A 4 E Edim7 E3 C 4 G4 A 4 F F F2 C4 F4 G 4 F Gbdim7 F 2 C4 D I A4 G G G2 A 3 D4 G4 G Ab G 2 C4 D 4 G 4 A A 7 b5 A2 C4 DIM G4 A Bb A 2 D4 F4 A 4 B Bdim7 B2 D4 F4 G 4 8 Trad Min 2 Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of Key Chord Forms Key Chord Forms c C71 C3 A13 D 4 FA e C4 G4 CH Db7 9 C 3 F3 B3 E4 CH E C 4 G 4 D D 7 b5 D3 C4 F4 G 4 D ES D4 A4 D Ebaug mat D 3 B3 D4 G4 D D 4 A 4 E E7 9 E2 G 3 D4 F 4 E pe E4 B4 F F7 9 F2 A3 D 4 G4 F z F4 C5 F Gbdim7 F 2 A3 C4 D 4 F F 4 C 5 G G7 9 G2 B3 F4 A 4 G a G4 D5 G Abmaj7 11 G 2 C4 D4 G4 G ES G 4 D 5 A A 7 b5 A2 C4 D
92. 2 2 S CEA Jazz Kick 3 2 High Q 1 High Q 1 High Q 1 High Q 1 28 JazzDryKick1 2 Slap 1 Slap 1 Slap 1 Slap 1 2o JazzDryKick2 2 Scratch Push EXC7 1 Scratch Push EXC7 1 Scratch Push EXC7 1 Scratch Push EXC7 1 C ER Mix Kick 1 Scratch Pull EXC7 1 Scratch Pull EXC7 1 Scratch Pull EXC7 1 Scratch Pull EXC7 1 31 Power Kick 1 Sticks 1 Sticks 1 Sticks 1 Sticks 1 ER Hard Kick 3 Square Click 1 Square Click 1 Square Click 1 Square Click 1 33 R amp B Kick 1 2 Mtrnm Click 1 Mimm Click 1 Mmmm Click 1 Mtmm Click 1 IEE Rae Kick 2 2 Mtrnm Bell 1 Mtrnm Bell 1 Mtrnm Bell 1 Mtrnm Bell 1 8s OldSharpKick 2 Mix Kick 1 Mix Kick 1 Mix Kick 1 Mix Kick 1 C236 Sharp Kick 2 StandardKick 1 StandardKick 1 Power Kick 1 Elec Kick 2 EA Old Kick 2 Side Stick 1 Side Stick 1 Side Stick 1 Side Stick 1 38 SH32 Kick 2 Standard Snr 1 Standard Snr 1 Dance Snare 1 Elec Snare 1 1 CERN TechnoKick 1 2 TR909 Clap 1 1 TR909 Clap 1 1 TR909 Clap 1 1 TR909 Clap 1 1 40 TR909 Kick 1 1 Elec Snare 3 1 Elec Snare 3 1 Elec Snare 3 1 Elec Snare 2 2 41 TR909 Kick 2 1 Real Tom 3 1 Room Tom 2 1 Rock Tom 2 1 Synth Drum 2 42 Elec Kick 2 Close HiHat EXC1 1 Close HiHat EXC1 1 Close HiHat EXC1 1 Close HiHat EXC1 1 43 TR808 Kick 1 1 Real Tom 3 1 Room Tom 2 1 Rock Tom 2 1 Synth Drum 2 LEO TR808 Kick 2 1 Standard PHH EXC1 1 Standard PHH EXC1 1 Standard PHH EXC1 1 Standard PHH EXC1 1 45 TR808 Kick 3 1 Rea
93. 2 SINGLE 542 Bs24 Deep Bass SBS 66 94 n SS 3 SINGLE 611 Rh43 Bird SFX 68 99 0 24 2 SINGLE 543 Bs25 SH DullBass SBS 66 95 m pd 2 SINGLE 612 Rh44 Dog SFX 68 00 1 24 SINGLE 544 Bs26 Square Bass SBS 66 96 Se 2 SINGLE 613 Rh45 Horse Gallop SFX 68 01 2 24 SINGLE 545 Bs27 Jungle Bass SBS 66 97 1 SINGLE 614 Rh46 Bird 2 SFX 68 02 3 24 SINGLE se 546 Bs28 Organ Bass SBS 66 98 a n 1 SINGLE 615 Rh47 Telephone 1 SFX 68 03 0 25 SINGLE 9 547 Bs29 Garage Bass SBS 66 99 s 1 SINGLE 616 Rh48 Telephone 2 SFX 68 04 1 25 SINGLE m 548 Bs30 Attack Bass SBS 66 00 _ 5 DUAL 617 Rh49 DoorCreaking SFX 68 05 2 25 SINGLE 2 549 Bs31 House Bass 2 SBS 66 01 SC m 1 SINGLE 618 Rh50 Door SFX 68 06 3 25 SINGLE 550 Bs32 RS SynBass 1 SBS 66 02 x E 2 SINGLE 619 Rh51 Scratch SFX 68 07 4 25 SINGLE 551 Bs33 SH 2 Bass SBS 66 03 od 2 SINGLE 620 Rh52 Wind Chimes SFX 68 08 5 25 SINGLE 552 Bs34 MG Punch Bs SBS 66 04 pa 2 SINGLE 621 Rh53 Helicopter SFX 68 09 0 26 SINGLE 553 Bs35 MG Lite Bs SBS 66 05 zn Se 2 SINGLE 622 Rh54 Car Engine SEX 68 10 1 26 SINGLE 554 Bs36 RS SynBass 2 SBS 66 06 ca Es 3 SINGLE 623 Rh55 Car Stop SFX 68 11 2 26 SINGLE 555 Bs37 FatTB Bass SBS 66 07 ae 2 SINGLE 624 Rh56 Car Pass SFX 68 12 3 26 SINGLE 556 Bs38 TB Bass SBS 66 08 eng 1 SINGLE 625 Rh57 Car Crash SFX 68 13 4 26 2 SINGLE 557 Bs39 PopSynthBass SBS 66 09 mm SS 2 SINGLE 626 Rh5
94. 3 Harpsi w KE 67 21 2 7 SINGLE 054 Pf54 FM SA EP EP 67 2 2 5 SINGLE 14 Ky54 Harpsi o KE 67 22 3 7 2 SINGLE 055 Pf55 60 s Rhodes EP 67 3 3 5 SINGLE 15 Ky55 Clav KE 67 23 0 8 SINGLE 056 Pf56 E Piano 2 EP 67 4 0 6 SINGLE 16 Ky56 Pulse Clav KE 67 24 1 8 SINGLE 057 Pf57 Detuned EP 2 EP 67 5 6 2 SINGLE 17 Ky57 Celesta KEY 67 25 0 9 SINGLE 058 Pf58 St FM EP EP 67 6 2 6 2 SINGLE 18 Ky58 Glockenspiel BEL 67 26 0 10 SINGLE 059 Pf59 EP Legend EP 67 7 3 6 2 SINGLE 19 Ky59 Music Box BEL 67 27 0 11 SINGLE 060 Pf60 EP Phase EP 67 8 4 6 2 SINGLE 20 Ky60 Vibraphone MLT 67 28 0 12 SINGLE 21 Ky6l Vibraphone w MLT 67 29 12 SINGLE 22 Ky62 Marimba MLT 67 30 0 13 SINGLE 23 Ky63 Marimba w MLT 67 31 13 SINGLE 24 Ky64 Xylophone MLT 67 32 0 14 SINGLE 25 Ky65 Tubular bell BEL 67 33 0 15 SINGLE 26 Ky66 Church Bell BEL 67 34 15 SINGLE 27 Ky67 Carillon BEL 67 35 2 15 SINGLE 28 Ky68 Organ 1 ORG 67 37 0 17 3 SINGLE 29 Ky69 Trem Organ ORG 67 38 17 2 SINGLE 30 Ky70 60 s Organ 1 ORG 67 39 2 17 2 SINGLE 31 Ky71 70 s E Organ ORG 67 40 3 17 2 SINGLE 32 Ky72 Organ 2 ORG 67 41 0 18 1 SINGLE
95. 3 WahWah Gtr 0223 RSSynBass 1 3 0293 St ChoirAahs 4 0014 Rock Piano 2 2 0084 Tiny Bell 1 0154 Muted Gt 0224 PopSynthBass 2 0294 Melted Choir 2 0015 Dance Piano 2 0085 Pretty Bell 2 0155 Funk Pop 0225 LightSynBass 2 0295 RS Choir 3 0016 Brite Piano 0086 RS Digi Bell 2 0156 Funk Gt 2 0226 101Bass 3 1 0296 Church Choir 2 0017 Honky tonk 1 2 0087 SouthernWind 4 0157 Jazz Man 2 0227 Smooth Bass 2 0297 Voice Oohs 0018 Honky tonk 2 2 0088 Mysterious 4 0158 D Mute Gtr 0228 Mild Bass 2 0298 Humming 2 0019 Honky tonk 3 2 0089 Santur 1 0159 Overdrive Gt 2 0229 Dark Bass 2 0299 Jazz Scat 0020 E Piano 1 1 0090 Organ 1 3 0160 Guitar Pinch 0230 Beef Bass 3 0300 Fem amp Male Chr 0021 St Soft EP 2 0091 Trem Organ 2 0161 5th OverDrv 0231 RS SynBass 2 3 0301 Female Oohs 0022 FM SA EP 2 0092 60 s Organ 1 2 0162 DistortionGt 0232 Unison Bass 2 0302 SynVox 0023 60 s Rhodes 1 0093 70 s E Organ 2 0163 Feedback Gtr 0233 OilDrum Bass 4 0303 Analog Voice 0024 RS Rhodes 1 0094 RS Organ 1 0164 Dist Rhy Gtr 0234 Detune Bass 3 0304 SH 2000 Vox 0025 Touch Rhodes 1 0095 RS Organ 2 0165 Heavy Gtr 0235 Violin 2 0305 RS SynVox 1 2 0026 70 s Ballad 2 0096 RS Organ 3 0166 Dazed Guitar 0236 Slow Violin 1 0306 RS SynVox 2 0027 Dyno Rhodes 2 0097 RS Organ 4 0167 5th Dist 0237 VInSolo Marc 1 0307 SynVox Key 2 0028 MKS20Rhodes 2 0098 RS Organ
96. 3 4 1 8Drive1 5 39 E Piano Phr 6 64 Brass Phr 10 5 1 8Drive2 5 40 Pno amp EpBackng 9 65 SynBrs Phr 6 6 1 8 Drive3 5 41 Clavi Phr 6 66 Sax Phr 6 7 1 8 Drive 4 5 42 Harpsi Phr 1 67 BrightPadPhr 6 8 1 8 Tripletl 5 43 Bell Phr 6 68 SoftPad Phr 6 9 1 8 Triplet2 5 44 Mallet Phr 6 69 Vox Phr 6 20 1 16 Basic 1 5 45 Organ Phr 8 70 Hard Ld Phr 6 21 1 16 Basic 2 5 46 Org Backing 4 71 Soft Ld Phr 6 22 1 16 Basic 3 5 47 AccordionPhr 5 72 TeknoSyn Phr 6 23 1 16 Basic 4 5 48 ACD Backing 2 73 Pulse Phr 6 24 1 16 Syncl 1 5 49 Harm Phr 6 74 FX Phr ri 25 1 16 Sync1 2 5 50 A Gt Phr 6 75 Synth Phr 9 Variations based on note values 1 4 1 8 1 12 1 16 1 32 Single and Dual Multi chord set list 1 Pop 1 3 Jazz 1 5 Blues Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of Key Chord Forms Key Chord Forms Key Chord Forms C Cadd9 C3 G3 D4 E4 C C69 C3 E3 A3 DA C C7 9 C3 A3 D4 F4 CH C maj9 C 3 C4 D 4 F4 CH C 7 9 C 3 F3 B3 E4 Cs C479 C 3 F3 B3 D 4 D D 7 D3 F4 A3 C4 D D 9 D3
97. 3 C 4 F4 D Minor Scale C4 D4 D 4 F4 G4 G 4 E Emaj7 9 E2 G 3 D 4 F 4 A 4 F EZ F2 GIG DH G D Harmonic Mi C4 D4 D 4 F4 G4 G 4 F Gbdim7 T2 A3 C4 D I EE Le G G7 3 G2 F3 B3 E4 E oS Minor 5 D4 D 4 F4 G4 A4 G Ab 6 G 2 B3 D 4 F4 A A765 A2 C DHL GA F Wee Tone C4 D4 E4 F 4 G 4 A 4 AR Bb 7 Af2 GIIS CH F4 FE Blue note Scale C4 D 4 F4 FH G4 A4 B B 7 b5 B2 A3 D4 F4 G Japanese Minor C4 C 4 F4 G4 A 4 Git Ryukyu Scale C4 E4 F4 G4 B4 A Bari Scale C4 C14 D 4 G4 G 4 13 Oct Stack AB Spanish Scale C4 C 4 E4 F4 G4 G 4 Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of A8 Key Chord Forms B Gypsy Scale C4 C 4 E4 F4 G4 G 4 C C4 C5 B4 CH C 4 CH5 D D4 D5 D D 4 D 5 E E4 E5 F ae F4 F5 FH F 4 F 5 G G4 G5 G G 4 G 5 A A4 A5 A A 4 A 5 B ES B4 B5 14 4th Stack Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of Key Chord Forms C C add9 C3 D4 D 4 G4 CK Eb7 on Db C 3 A 3 D 4 G4 D D 7 b5 D3 G 3 C4 F4 D Ebmaj7 D 3 A 3 D4 G4 E Emaj7 9 E3 G 3 D 4 F 4 F F 7 9 F2 G 3 D 4 G4 F Gbdim7 F 2 A3 C4 D 4 G G7 b13 G2 F3 B3 D 4 Gi Abmaj7 G 2 C4 D 4 G4 A A 7 b5 A2 C4 D 4 G4 Ad C 7 on Bb A42 C4 D 4 G4 B C maj7 B B2 D4 D 4 G4 Assign Chord Name Constituent Notes of Key Chord
98. 5 0168 Gt Harmonics 0238 Viola 1 0308 FM Vox 0029 StageRhodes1 2 0099 Animal Organ 0169 Gt Feedback 0239 Cello 2 0309 Tape Choir 0030 StageRhodes2 1 0100 Old Organ 0170 Acoustic Bs 2 0240 VicSolo Spic 1 0310 Doos Arpeg 4 0031 Swurly 1 0101 D 50 Organ 0171 RS Ac Bass 1 2 0241 Contrabass 1 0311 ChaosChoir 1 4 0032 BalladPanner 2 0102 Surf Organ 0172 RS Ac Bass 2 2 0242 Tremolo Str 2 0312 ChaosChoir 2 4 0033 Sine Rhodes 2 0103 Organ2 0173 Upright Bs 2 0243 PizzicatoStr 1 0313 ChaosChoir 3 2 0034 Phase EP 2 0104 Chorus Or 2 3 0174 Fingered Bs 1 0244 Captain Pizz 4 0314 OrchestraHit 2 0035 Phase Rhodes 2 0105 Perc Organ 2 0175 Finger Slap 2 0245 Pizzy Techno 1 0315 Bass Hit 2 0036 Tremolo Dyno 2 0106 Garage Organ 2 0176 RS FngBs 1 2 0246 Harp 1 0316 6th Hit 2 0037 E Piano2 1 0107 Club Organ 2 0177 RS FngBs 2 2 0247 Yang Qin 2 0317 Euro Hit 2 0038 Detuned EP2 2 0108 R amp B Organ 3 0178 RS Jazz Bs 2 0248 Brite Harp 2 0318 Club Hit 4 0039 SLFM EP 2 0109 FM PercOrg 0179 Picked Bass1 0249 Timpani 1 0319 Back Hit 0040 EP Legend 2 0110 Org Pere 0180 Picked Bass2 0250 Strings 2 0320 Techno Hit 0041 EP Phase 2 0111 Organ 3 2 0181 RS Rock Bs 2 0251 Orchestra 3 0321 Philly Hit 0042 Pure EP 1 0112 Power B Slw 0182 Fretless Bs 0252 60 s Strings 2 0322 Noise amp SawHit 2 0043 FM Rhodes 1 0113 Power B Fst 0183 RS Frtless
99. 6 Sy07 MG Lead 4 HLD 66 31 SINGLE 457 Sy08 PM Lead HLD 66 32 SINGLE 458 Sy09 Sqr amp Saw Ld HLD 66 33 4 SINGLE 459 Sy10 800 Lead HLD 66 34 SINGLE 460 Syll Homey Lead HLD 66 35 SINGLE 114 9 BASS 0 RHYTHM amp SFX No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2Patch Select Voice Key No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2Patch Select Voice Key gory MSB 87 MSB 121 Mode gory MSB 87 MSB 121 Mode LSB PC LSB PC LSB PC LSB PC 519 Bs01 RS Ac Bass 1 BS 66 71 2 SINGLE Rh01 Rh20 Rhythm set list p 116 520 Bs02 RS Ac Bass2 BS 66 72 2 SINGLE 589 Rh21 RSSteelDrum PRC 66 125 SS SINGLE 521 Bs03 Upright Bs BS 66 73 SC Se 2 SINGLE 590 Rh22 W Chime Down PRC 66 126 ce SINGLE 522 Bs04 RS Fng Bs 1 BS 66 74 ae 4 DUAL 591 Rh23 Nz amp SawHit SFX 66 127 rem ees 2 SINGLE 523 Bs05 RS Fng Bs2 BS 66 75 xd EH 2 SINGLE 592 Rh24 NylonGtr Nz SEX 66 128 Ix SINGLE 524 Bs06 RS Fng Bs3 BS 66 76 eng 2 SINGLE 593 Rh25 Timpani PRC 67 103 0 48 SINGLE 525 Bs07 RS Jazz Bs BS 66 77 2 SINGLE 594 Rh26 Agogo PRC 68 76 0 14 SIN
100. 609 RUSSIA MuTek 3 Bogatyrskaya Str 1 k 1 107 564 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 169 5043 SPAIN Roland Electronics de Espa a S A Calle Bolivia 239 08020 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 308 1000 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 0 8 702 00 20 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland AG Landstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4452 Itingen SWITZERLAND TEL 061 927 8383 UKRAINE TIC TAC Mira Str 19 108 P O Box 180 295400 Munkachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 702701 MIDDLE EAST BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 16 Bab Al Bahrain Avenue P O Box 247 Manama 304 State of BAHRAIN TEL 211 005 CYPRUS Radex Sound Equipment Ltd 17 Diagorou Street Nicosia CYPRUS TEL 022 66 9426 IRAN MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 021 285 4169 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha aliya Hashnya St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN AMMAN Trading Agency 245 Prince Mohammad St Amman 1118 JORDAN TEL 06 464 1200 KUWAIT Easa Husain Al Yousifi Est Abdullah Salem Street Safat KUWAIT TEL 243 6399 LEBANON Chahine S A L Gerge Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh P O Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 20 144
101. 8 Siren SFX 68 14 5 26 SINGLE 558 Bs40 Acid TB Bs SBS 66 0 zc Si 1 SINGLE 627 Rh59 Train SEX 68 15 6 26 SINGLE 559 Bs41 TB Dist Saw SBS 66 d em 1 SINGLE 628 Rh60 Jetplane SFX 68 16 7 26 2 SINGLE 560 Bs42 RSSynBass 3 SBS 66 2 ad 2 DUAL 629 Rh61 Starship SFX 68 17 8 26 2 SINGLE 561 Bs43 Mini Bass SBS 66 3 1 SINGLE 630 Rh62 Burst Noise SFX 68 18 9 26 2 SINGLE 562 Bs44 JUNO Bass 1 SBS 66 4 SS 1 SINGLE 631 Rh63 Applause SFX 68 19 0 27 2 SINGLE 563 Bs45 JUNO Bass 2 SBS 66 5 Ex 1 SINGLE 632 Rh64 Laughing SFX 68 20 1 27 1 SINGLE 564 Bs46 MG Bass 1 SBS 66 6 2 SINGLE 633 Rh65 Screaming SFX 68 21 2 27 1 SINGLE 565 Bs47 MG Bass 2 SBS 66 7 Es 2 SINGLE 634 Rh66 Punch SFX 68 22 3 27 1 SINGLE 566 Bs48 Unison Bs 1 SBS 66 8 SS Gg 2 SINGLE 635 Rh67 Heart Beat SFX 68 23 4 27 1 SINGLE 567 Bs49 Unison Bs 2 SBS 66 9 3 SINGLE 636 Rh68 Footsteps SFX 68 24 5 27 1 SINGLE 568 Bs50 Unison Bs 3 SBS 66 20 E 3 SINGLE 637 Rh69 Gun Shot SEX 68 25 0 28 1 SINGLE 569 Bs51 Unison Bs 4 SBS 66 21 2 SINGLE 638 Rh70 Machine Gun SFX 68 26 1 28 1 SINGLE 570 Bs52 Unison Bs 5 SBS 66 22 E 4 SINGLE 639 Rh71 Lasergun SFX 68 27 2 28 1 SINGLE 571 Bs53 Detune Bass SBS 66 23 3 SINGLE 640 Rh72 Explosion SFX 68 28 3 28 2 SINGLE 572 Bs54 AEx Synth Bs SBS 66 24 SS 3 DUAL 573 Bs55 Acoustic Bs BS 67 78 0 33 2 SINGLE 574 Bs56 Fingered Bs
102. 808 Tom 2 1 Real Tom 1 1 Real Tom 1 1 Timpani 1 Gt CutNoise 1 ER TR808 Crash 1 Crash Cym 1 1 Brush Crash 1 Timpani 1 Gt CutNoise 1 50 TR808 Tom 2 1 Real Tom 1 1 Real Tom 1 1 Timpani 1 String Slap 1 EEE Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Timpani 1 Fl KeyClick 1 52 ChinaCymbal1 1 ChinaCymbal1 1 ChinaCymbal1 1 Timpani 1 Laughing 1 53 Ride Bell 2 1 Ride Bell 2 1 Ride Bell 2 1 Timpani 1 Screaming 1 C ER Tambourine 3 1 Tambourine 3 1 Tambourine 3 1 Tambourine 3 1 Punch 1 55 Splash Cym 1 Splash Cym 1 Splash Cym 1 Splash Cym 1 Heart Beat 1 E E TR808Cowbell 1 Cowbell 1 Cowbell 1 Cowbell 1 Footsteps 1 c 57 Crash Cym 2 1 Crash Cym 2 1 Crash Cym 2 1 ConcertCym 1 1 Footsteps 1 2 mos Vibraslap 1 Vibraslap 1 Vibraslap 1 Vibraslap 1 Applause 2 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 ConcertCym 2 2 Creaking 1 C4l60 Bongo High 1 1 Bongo High 1 1 Bongo High 1 1 Bongo High 1 1 Door 1 DR Bongo Low 1 1 Bongo Low 1 1 Bongo Low 1 1 Bongo Low 1 1 Scratch 1 1 62 TR808Conga 1 1 CongaHi Mt 1 Conga Hi Mt 1 Conga Hi Mt 1 Wind Chimes 1 LEM TR808Conga 1 1 CongaHi Open 1 CongaHi Open 1 CongaHi Open 1 Car Engine 1 64 TR808Conga 1 1 CongaLowOpen 1 CongaLowOpen 1 CongaLowOpen 1 Car Stop 1 65 Timbale Hi 1 1 Timbale Hi 1 1 Timbale Hi 1 1 Timbale Hi 1 1 Car Pass 1 E Timbale Lv 1 1 Timbale Lw 1 1 Timbale Lw 1 1 Timbale Lw 1 1 Car Crash 2 67 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Siren 1 EM Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Train 1 69 C
103. 83 Setting multi effects edidi E ea 42 LOFI p 83 pa ra mete rs 43 SLICER p 84 There are 47 types of multi effects You can select any one of these T5 TREMOLO p 84 After selecting the Type you can change the values for each of the 45 AUTO PAN p 84 parameters 46 TUMBLING DLY p 85 47 FBK RIPPER p 85 Type Multi Effects Type Selections are made from the following 47 different multi effects Additionally parameters for each of the multi effects types can be found on the following pages Value 00 THROUGH p 69 01 STEREO EQ p 69 02 OVERDRIVE p 69 03 DISTORTION p 70 04 PHASER p 70 05 SPECTRUM p 70 06 ENHANCER p 70 07 AUTO WAH p 71 08 ROTARY p 71 09 COMPRESSOR p 71 Adding effects Send Lvl to Cho Multi effect send level to chorus Sets the amount of the multi effects sound that is sent to the chorus Higher values result in more sound being sent Value 0 127 Send Lvl to Rev Multi effect send level to reverb Sets the amount of the multi effects sound that is sent to the reverb Higher values result in more sound being sent Value 0 127 Ctrl 1 2 Multi Effects Control 1 2 On the RS 50 certain multi effect parameters can be assigned to the modulation lever knobs pedal or D Beam Of the parameters explained in Multi effect parameters the assignable parameters are marked with a symbol Parameters marked with 1 or 2 c
104. BEND UP Pitch bend effect center gt up BEND DOWN Pitch bend effect center gt down In Patch mode the effect will apply to the patch In Performance mode the effect will apply to the patch assigned to the current part Use DESTINATION TONE to specify the tone p 26 TxCC refers to the controller number of control change messages sent from the MIDI OUT connector when the D Beam controller is operated When set to AFTERTOUCH Channel Aftertouch messages are sent Set to AFTERTOUCH mainly when you want to control an external sound generator with Aftertouch messages Receiving these control change messages from the MIDI IN connector produces the same effect as moving the D Beam controller When set to MFX PARAMETERI or MFX PARAMETER2 be sure to note the following When the multi effects Type is set to 01 STEREO EQ p 69 or 42 LOFI p 83 Level is changed regardless of whether MFX PARAMETERI or MFX PARAMETER is selected e When the multi effects Type is set to 23 2V PCH SHIFT p 77 or 24 FB PCH SHIFT p 78 the two parameters are changed simultaneously When making the LFO RATE LFO DEPTH or LFO DELAY settings the effect achieved differs depending on whether FILTER LFO is on or off When FILTER LFO is off the LFO alters the pitch vibrato effect When FILTER LFO is on the LFO changes the Filter Cutoff frequency wah effect 33 Applying various effects to the sound Bi Ad
105. Bs 0253 Orchestra 1 3 0323 Trumpet 2 0044 FM Rhodes 2 2 0114 Gospel B 0184 Syn Fretless 0254 Orchestra 2 2 0324 Dark Trumpet 0045 Stack EPiano 2 0115 Purple B 0185 Mr Smooth 0255 Orchestra 3 3 0325 Bright Tp 2 0046 Hard FM 2 0116 RS Mad Org 0186 Slap Bass 1 0256 Dry Strings 2 0326 RS Trumpet 1 0047 Harpsichord1 1 0117 Church Org 1 0187 Unison Slap 0257 StJV Str 2 0327 RS Trumpet 2 0048 Coupled Hps 2 0118 Church Org2 0188 Slap Bass2 0258 JV Strings 1 0328 RS Solo Tp 0049 Harpsi w 1 0119 Church Org 3 0189 Slap Bass 3 0259 DanceStrings 1 0329 Penny Tpt 0050 Harpsi o 2 0120 Reed Organ 0190 Synth Bass 1 0260 Str Spiccato 1 0330 Flugel Horn 0051 Harpsichord2 2 0121 Puff Organ 0191 SynthBass101 0261 RSStStr 2 0331 Dual Horns 2 0052 Harpsichord3 2 0122 Accordion Fr 0192 Acid Bass 0262 Brite Str 2 0332 Trombone 1 0053 Synth Harpsi 2 0123 Accordion It 2 0193 Clavi Bass 0263 Velo Strings 4 0333 Trombone 2 0054 Clav 0124 Harmonica 0194 Hammer 0264 Oct Strings1 2 0334 Bright Tb 0055 Pulse Clav 0125 Bandoneon 2 0195 101Bass 1 0265 Oct Strings2 2 0335 RS Trombone 0056 RSClavi 1 0126 Vodkakordion 4 0196 101Bass 2 0266 Tron Strings 1 0336 RS Trombone2 0057 RS Clavi 2 0127 Squeeze Me 4 0197 MC202 Bs 0267 Slow Strings 2 0337 Tuba 0058 RS Clavi3 0128 Guinguette 4 0198 House Bs 1 0268 SlowStrings2 2 0338 RS Tuba
106. Controller numbers set with Modulation Assign p 89 Pedal Control Assign p 90 and Knob Assign p 90 to the RS 50 achieves the same effect as working the Modulation lever pedals and knobs Recording to an external sequencer Now try using an external sequencer to record your music onto multiple tracks and then play back the recorded performance Connecting to an external sequencer lt q gt MIDI IN MIDI OUT MM H l RS 50 1 Before starting the connection procedure make sure that the power to all devices has been turned off 2 After reading Connecting the RS 50 to external equipment p 14 connect an audio device system or headphones 3 Connect the external MIDI sound device with a MIDI cable as shown in the figure below 4 As described in Turning on the power p 15 turn on the power of each device Making settings before recording When recording to an external sequencer the following steps must be carried out e Set the RS 50 s Local Control to OFF refer to the next section e Turn on the external sequencer s Thru function p 97 e Set the performance p 97 Setting the RS 50 s local control to OFF The setting that determines whether the keyboard controller section p 40 and sound generator section are separated is referred to as Local Control When Local Control is on playing the keyboard
107. D Drive Dist Drive Specifies the amount of distortion OD Pan gt Dist Pan Specifies the stereo location of the distortion O 9 Balance D o O R out Balance D sound Lin L out Balance W Rin 31 DIST gt FLANGER Distortion Flanger This effect connects distortion and flanger in series The parameters are essentially the same as in 28 OD gt FLANGER with the exception of the following two OD Drive Dist Drive Specifies the amount of distortion OD Pan gt Dist Pan Specifies the stereo location of the distortion sound Balance D Lin O L out Feedback QM FI anger O R out Balance D Rin 32 DIST DELAY Distortion Delay This effect connects distortion and delay in series The parameters are essentially the same as in 29 OD gt DELAY with the exception of the following two OD Drive Dist Drive Specifies the amount of distortion OD Pan Dist Pan Specifies the stereo location of the distortion sound L in Balance D KI Balance W CY Balance W Rin R out Balance D Adding effects 33 ENH CHORUS Enhancer Chorus This effect connects an enhancer and a chorus in series L in O Balance D Ce Balance W O L out CT Balance W R out Balance D Parameter Description Enhancer Sens Adjusts the sensitivity of the en hancer Enhancer Mix Adjusts the ratio with which th
108. DI OUT connector This function can be used to save patch settings on an external sequencer If you select DUMP ALL for the menu you can transmit all data stored in the user area to an external sequencer 1 Press PATCH so it is lit and you are in Patch mode Select the patch or the rhythm set you want to output 2 Press UTILITY 3 Use PAGE CURSOR a to select 4 XFER to MIDI 4 Press ENTER Transmitting the settings of currently selected patch 5 Use VALUE to select CURRENT PATCH 6 Press ENTER The selected patch settings will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector After the data has been transmitted the display will indicate COMPLETED This ends the procedure Transmitting the settings of a user patch 5 Use VALUE to select USER PATCHES 6 Press PAGE CURSOR Use VALUE to specify the first number of the range of user patch numbers that you want to transmit 7 Press PAGE CURSOR Use VALUE to specify the last number of the range of user patch numbers that you want to transmit 8 Press ENTER The selected patch settings will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector After the data has been transmitted the display will indicate COMPLETED This ends the procedure Transmitting all data stored in the user area 5 Use VALUE J 4 to select DUMP ALL 6 Press ENTER All
109. E CC05 Portamento Time p 47 VOLUME CC07 Level BALANCE CC08 The volume balance of LOW ER and UPPER tones p 45 PAN CC10 Pan p 46 EXPRESSION CC11 Level PORTAMENTO CC65 Portamento Switch p 47 SOSTENUTO CC66 Holds the sound of the key be ing pressed SOFT CC67 Softens the tone RESONANCE CC71 Tone Filter Resonance p 48 RELEASE TIME CC72 Tone Envelope Release Time p 48 ATTACK TIME CC73 Tone Envelope Attack Time p 48 CUTOFF CC74 Tone Filter Cutoff p 47 DECAY TIME CC75 Tone Envelope Decay Time p 48 LFO RATE CC76 Tone LFO Rate p 47 LFO DEPTH CC77 Tone LFO Depth p 47 LFO DELAY CC78 Tone LFO Delay p 47 CHO SEND LEVEL CC93 Chorus Send Level p 46 REV SEND LEVEL CC91 Reverb Send Level p 46 MFX PARAMETER1 CC12 The parameter specified by Multi effect Control 1 p 69 MFXPARAMETER2 CC13 The parameter specified by Multi effect Control 2 p 69 AFTERTOUCH In Patch mode the modulation lever will affect the patch In Performance mode the modulation lever will affect the patch that is assigned to the current part Use DESTINATION TONE to specify the tone that will be affected p 26 TxCC refers to the controller number of the control change message sent from the MIDI OUT connector when the modulation lever is operated When set to AFTERTOUCH Channel Aftertouch messages are sent Set to AFTERTOUCH mainly when you want to control an external sound generato
110. GLE 526 Bs08 Bright Bass BS 66 78 SS 1 SINGLE 595 Rh27 Woodblock PRC 68 78 0 16 SINGLE 527 Bs09 RS Rock Bs BS 66 79 SC 2 SINGLE 596 Rh28 Castanets PRC 68 79 16 SINGLE 528 Bs10 RS FretlsBs1 BS 66 80 2 SINGLE 597 Rh29 Taiko PRC 68 80 0 17 SINGLE 529 Bs11 RS FretlsBs2 BS 66 81 ET 2 SINGLE 598 Rh30 Concert BD PRC 68 81 17 SINGLE 530 Bs12 Mr Smooth BS 66 82 ora 2 SINGLE 599 Rh31 Melo Tom 1 PRC 68 82 0 18 SINGLE 531 Bs13 RS Slap Bs 1 BS 66 83 mm 1 SINGLE 600 Rh32 Melo Tom 2 PRC 68 83 18 SINGLE 532 Bs14 RS Slap Bs 2 BS 66 84 2 SINGLE 601 Rh33 Synth Drum PRC 68 84 0 19 2 SINGLE 533 Bs15 Unison Slap BS 66 85 2 SINGLE 602 Rh34 808 Tom PRC 68 85 19 2 SINGLE 534 Bs16 AEx FingerBs BS 66 86 Se 3 DUAL 603 Rh35 Elec Perc PRC 68 86 2 19 SINGLE 535 Bs17 MC202 Bass SBS 66 87 E 1 SINGLE 604 Rh36 Reverse Cym PRC 68 87 0 20 SINGLE 536 Bs18 House Bass 1 SBS 66 88 1 SINGLE 605 Rh37 Seashore SE 68 93 0 23 SINGLE 537 Bs19 SH101 Bass 1 SBS 66 89 1 SINGLE 606 Rh38 Rain SFX 68 94 23 SINGLE 538 Bs20 SH101 Bass 2 SBS 66 90 SS 1 SINGLE 607 Rh39 Thunder SEX 68 95 2 23 SINGLE 539 Bs21 Dark Bass SBS 66 91 d 2 SINGLE 608 Rh40 Wind SEX 68 96 3 23 SINGLE 540 Bs22 Smooth Bass SBS 66 92 rod 2 SINGLE 609 Rh41 Stream SFX 68 97 4 23 2 SINGLE 541 Bs23 Low Bass SBS 66 93 E 2 SINGLE 610 Rh42 Bubble SEX 68 98 5 23
111. GLE 87 Gt39 Mid Tene GTR EGT 67 66 28 SINGLE 254 Or52 Philly Hit HIT 65 42 SINGLE 88 Gt40 Muted Gt EGT 67 67 29 SINGLE 255 Or53 Violin STR 67 94 0 41 2 SINGLE 89 Gt41 Funk Pop EGT 67 68 29 SINGLE 256 Or54 Slow Violin STR 67 95 1 41 SINGLE 90 Gt42 Funk Gt 2 EGT 67 69 2 29 SINGLE 257 Or55 Viola STR 67 96 0 42 SINGLE 91 Gt43 Jazz Man EGT 67 70 29 SINGLE 258 Or56 Cello STR 67 97 0 43 2 SINGLE 92 Gt44 Overdrive Gt DGT 67 71 30 SINGLE 259 Or57 Contrabass STR 67 98 0 44 SINGLE 93 Gt45 Guitar Pinch DGT 67 72 30 SINGLE 260 Or58 Tremolo Str STR 67 99 0 45 2 SINGLE 94 Gt46 DistortionGt DGT 67 73 0 31 2 SINGLE 261 Or59 PizzicatoStr STR 67 100 0 46 SINGLE 95 Gt47 Feedback Gt DGT 67 74 31 2 SINGLE 262 Or60 Strings STR 67 104 0 49 2 SINGLE 96 Gt48 DistRtmGTR DGT 67 75 2 31 SINGLE 263 Or61 Orchestra OCH 67 105 1 49 3 SINGLE 97 Gt49 GtHarmonics EGT 67 76 0 32 SINGLE 264 Or62 60s Strings STR 67 106 2 49 2 SINGLE 98 Gt50 Gt Feedback EGT 67 77 32 SINGLE 265 Or63 Slow Strings STR 67 107 0 50 2 SINGLE 99 Gt51 Atmosphere AGT 68 58 0 100 2 SINGLE 266 Or64 SynStrings1 STR 67 108 0 51 2 SINGLE 112
112. IT to stop the patch audition Selecting a rhythm set The RS 50 provides rhythm sets that let you play different percussion instrument sounds or special effects from each key PATCH MODIFY 1 Press PATCH so it is lit and you are in Patch mode 2 Press 0 to select RHYTHM amp SFX weus 3 Use VALUE to switch rhythm sets MEETS ETE There are patches other than rhythm sets in the Rhythm amp SFX category group turn NUMERIC on and Rhythm sets have KIT MENU or GM2 in their names use the 0 9 buttons to input a rhythm set number directly Press ENTER to finalize the number p 43 Rhythm set list p 116 22 Try out the sounds Playing arpeggios Phrase Arpeggio An arpeggio is a broken chord where each note is played separately The Phrase Arpeggio function lets you produce an arpeggio simply by holding down a chord and is also a convenient way to input a performance into an external sequencer Since the RS 50 provides arpeggio templates that are suitable for the various sounds you select you can produce appropriate arpeggios immediately You can also select Phrase Template which allows you to play arpeggio using only one key without pressing a chord p 62 t oO S n m A m 6 PATCH MODIFY
113. L64 63R Adjusts the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 07 AUTO WAH Adding effects The Auto Wah cyclically controls a filter to create cyclic change in timbre L in Rin gt L out gt R out Parameter Value Description Filter Type LPF BPF Selects the type of filter LPF The wah effect will be ap plied over a wide frequency range BPF The wah effect will be ap plied over a narrow frequency range Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the frequency of the modulation Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of the modu lation Sens 0 127 Adjusts the sensitivity with which the filter is controlled Manual 0 127 Adjusts the center frequency from which the effect is applied Peak 0 127 Adjusts the amount of the wah effect that will occur in the area of the center frequency Lower settings will cause the effect to be applied in a broad area around the center frequency Higher settings will cause the ef fect to be applied in a more nar row range Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level Parameter Value Description Speed SLOW FAST Simultaneously switch the rota tional speed of the low frequen cy rotor and high frequency rotor SLOW Slows down the rotation to the specified speed the Low Slow Hi Slow values FAS
114. LE 238 Or36 RS Pizz STR 65 26 5 DUAL 72 Gt24 D Mute Gtr DGT 64 6 SINGLE 239 Or37 RS Harp OCH 65 27 2 SINGLE 73 Gt25 5th OverDrv DGT 64 7 2 SINGLE 240 Or38 RS Oboe WND 65 28 SINGLE 74 Gt26 Power Chord DGT 64 8 2 SINGLE 241 Or39 RSEnglshHm WND 65 29 SINGLE 75 Gt27 Nylon str Gt AGT 67 54 0 25 2 SINGLE 242 Or40 RS Bassoon WND 65 30 SINGLE 76 Gt28 Ukulele AGT 67 55 25 SINGLE 243 Or41 RS Clarinet WND 65 31 SINGLE 77 Gt29 Nylon Gt o AGT 67 56 2 25 2 SINGLE 244 Or42 RS Flute 1 FLT 65 32 SINGLE 78 Gt30 Nylon Gt 2 AGT 67 57 3 25 SINGLE 245 Or43 RS Flute2 FLT 65 33 2 SINGLE 79 Gt31 Steel str Gt AGT 67 58 0 26 SINGLE 246 Or44 Tron Flute FLT 65 34 SINGLE 80 Gt32 12 str Gt AGT 67 59 26 2 SINGLE 247 Or45 RS Piccolo FLT 65 35 SINGLE 81 Gt33 Mandolin AGT 67 60 2 26 2 SINGLE 248 Or46 RS Calliope FLT 65 36 3 SINGLE 82 Gt34 Steel Body AGT 67 61 3 26 2 SINGLE 249 Or47 RS Sicu Pipe FLT 65 37 SINGLE 83 Gt35 Jazz Gt EGT 67 62 0 27 SINGLE 250 Or48 RS Blow FLT 65 38 SINGLE 84 Gt36 Pedal Steel EGT 67 63 27 SINGLE 251 Or49 Club Hit HIT 65 39 SINGLE 85 Gt37 Clean Gt EGT 67 64 0 28 SINGLE 252 Or50 Back Hit HIT 65 40 SINGLE 86 Gt38 Chorus Gt EGT 67 65 28 2 SINGLE 253 Or51 Techno Hit HIT 65 41 SIN
115. LowOpen 1 65 TR909 Snr 1 1 Timbale Hi 1 1 Timbale Hi 1 1 Timbale Hi 1 1 Timbale Hi 1 1 SSH R909 Snr 2 1 Timbale Lw 1 1 Timbale Lw 1 1 Timbale Lw 1 1 Timbale Lw 1 1 67 TR909 Snr 3 2 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 g es TR808 Snr 1 2 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 Agogo 1 69 TR808 Snr 2 1 Cabasa 1 Cabasa 1 Cabasa 1 Cabasa 1 e 0 House Snr 1 Maracas T Maracas 1 Maracas 1 Maracas 1 7 Finger Snr 1 ShortWhistle EXC2 1 ShortWhistle EXC2 1 ShortWhistle EXC2 1 ShortWhistle EXC2 1 C572 Dance Snare 1 Long Whistle EXC2 1 Long Whistle EXC2 1 Long Whistle EXC2 1 Long Whistle EXC2 1 Eil Elec Snare 1 1 Guiro Short EXC3 1 Guiro Short EXC3 1 Guiro Short EXC3 1 Guiro Short EXC3 1 74 Elec Snare 2 2 Guiro Long ESCH 1 Guiro Long ESCH 1 Guiro Long EXC3 1 Guiro Long EXC3 1 CEO Elec Snare 3 1 Claves 1 Claves 1 Claves 1 Claves 1 76 Jazz Rim 1 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 77 RS Stick 2 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 EZB Dry Stick 1 1 Cuica Mute EXC4 1 Cuica Mute EXC4 1 Cuica Mute EXC4 1 Cuica Mute EXC4 1 79 Dry Stick 2 2 Cuica Open Exc4 1 Cuica Open Exc4 1 Cuica Open Exc4 1 Cuica Open Exc4 1 R R amp B Stick 3 Triangl Mt 1 EXC5 1 Triangl Mt 1 EXC5 1 Triangl Mt 1 EXC5 1 Triangl Mt 1 EXC5 1 81 Sticks 1 Triangl Op 1 EXC5 1 Triangl Op 1 EXC5 1 Triangl Op 1 EXC5 1 Triangl Op 1 EXC5 1 GEO Side Stick 1 Shaker 1 1 Shaker 1 1 Shaker 1 1 Shaker 1 1
116. M Phr 5 5 D Gt Phr 5 6 E Piano Arp1 6 MLT Arp 1 6 HRM Arp 6 D Gt Arp 1 7 E Piano Arp2 7 MLT Arp2 7 HRM Arp 2 7 D Gt Arp 2 8 E Piano Arp3 8 MLT Arp 3 8 HRM Arp 3 8 D Gt Arp 3 9 E Piano Arp4 9 MLT Arp 4 9 HRM Arp 4 9 D Gt Arp 4 Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Keyboard 1 Clavi Phr 1 Organ 1 Organ Phr 1 Ac Guitar 1 A Gt Phr 1 Strings 1 Strings Phr1 2 Clavi Phr 2 2 Organ Phr 2 2 A Gt Phr 2 2 Strings Phr2 3 Clavi Phr 3 3 Organ Phr 3 3 A Gt Phr 3 3 Strings Phr3 4 Clavi Phr 4 4 Organ Phr 4 4 A Gt Phr 4 4 Pizz Phr 5 Clavi Phr 5 5 Organ Phr 5 5 A Gt Phr 5 5 Violin Phr 6 Harpsi Phr 6 Organ Arp 1 6 A Gt Arp 1 6 Strings Arpl 7 Clavi Arp1 7 Organ Arp 2 7 A Gt Arp 2 7 Strings Arp2 8 Clavi Arp2 8 Organ Arp 3 8 A Gt Arp 3 8 Strings Arp3 9 Clavi Arp3 9 Organ Arp 4 9 A Gt Arp 4 9 Strings Arp4 120 Arpeggio template list
117. MODIFY to the C1 C2 C3 knobs you must switch the Patch Modify select button to ENV envelope If BALANCE LFO is selected the balance and LFO will change f you are using the C1 C2 C3 knobs in Performance mode to control MFX PARAMETER settings the MFX Source p 56 setting will determine the part whose effect will be controlled If MFX Source is set to Part1 16 the effect of that part will be controlled If MFX Source is set to PERFORM the System Perform Ctrl Ch Performance Control Channel p 90 setting will determine the part whose effect will be controlled If this setting is OFF no effect will be controlled Settings related to MIDI MIDI Patch Rx Ch Patch Receive Channel Specifies the receive channel of MIDI messages in Patch mode VALUE 1 16 Patch Tx Ch Patch Transmit Channel Specifies the transmit channel of MIDI messages in Patch mode If you do not want to transmit MIDI messages to external MIDI devices turn this parameter OFF If you want the transmit channel to always match the Patch Receive Channel set this parameter to RxCh VALUE 1 16 RxCh OFF Perform Ctrl Ch Performance Control Channel Performance Ctrl Ch selects the MIDI receive channel used during switching of performances when MIDI messages Program Change Bank Select are sent from an external MIDI device Set this to OFF if performances are not to be switched from an external MIDI device
118. PC 394 Voll ChaosChoir 2 VOX 65 17 7 DUAL 461 Sy12 D 50 FatSaw HLD 66 36 2 SINGLE 395 Vo12 AEx StackVox VOX 65 18 4 DUAL 462 Sy13 P5 Saw HLD 66 37 2 SINGLE 396 Vo13 Heaven Pad SPD 65 19 2 SINGLE 463 Syl4 MG Saw HLD 66 38 SINGLE 397 Vo14 D 50 Retour SPD 65 20 4 SINGLE 464 Sy15 OB Saw HLD 66 39 SINGLE 398 Vo15 Warm Sqr Pad SPD 65 21 3 SINGLE 465 Syl6 Waspy Synth HLD 66 40 2 SINGLE 399 Vol6 Hollow Pad SPD 65 22 5 DUAL 466 Sy17 Naked Cheese HLD 66 41 SINGLE 400 Vo17 RS Hollow SPD 65 23 8 DUAL 467 Sy18 Velo Cheese HLD 66 42 3 SINGLE 401 Vo18 JP8 Hollow SPD 65 24 4 SINGLE 468 Sy19 Spectrum HLD 66 43 SINGLE 402 V019 JP8Haunting SPD 65 25 4 SINGLE 469 Sy20 RS Sqr Wave HLD 66 44 SINGLE 403 Vo20 OB2 Pad 1 SPD 65 26 2 SINGLE 470 Sy21 OB Lead SLD 66 45 2 SINGLE 404 Vo21 OB2 Pad 2 SPD 65 27 1 SINGLE 471 Sy22 Shmoog SLD 66 46 2 SINGLE 405 Vo22 Saw Sweep 1 SPD 65 28 3 SINGLE 472 Sy23 RS Theramax SLD 66 47 SINGLE 406 Vo23 Saw Sweep 2 SPD 66 1 2 SINGLE 473 Sy24 JD Triangle SLD 66 48 SINGLE 407 Vo24 Saw Sweep 3 SPD 66 2 9 SINGLE 474 Sy25 Sine SLD 66 49 SINGLE 408 Vo25 Soft Pad 1 SPD 66 3 3 DUAL 475 Sy26 Twin Sine SLD 66 50 2 SINGLE 409 Vo26
119. Press PAGE CURSOR a to move the cursor under the key number 4 Either press a key or use VALUE to specify the key C B for which the chord is to be saved 5 Press PAGE CURSOR to move the cursor to the right 6 Press keys to input chords The display will indicate how many keys were pressed You can input 8 notes 7 Release all the keys The previously saved chords will be erased and the new chords will be saved 8 Repeat the above steps to continue inputting 9 When you have finished creating the chord set press WRITE 10 Use VALUE to specify the user chord set number You can create up to 8 user chord sets 11 Press ENTER When the user chord set has been saved the display will indicate COMPLETED Adding effects The RS 50 contains three effects processors multi effects chorus and reverb Settings can be made separately for each effects processor There are 47 types of multi effects 8 types of chorus and 8 types of reverb You can use one of each type in a patch or part e Multi effect chorus Reverb parameters can also be saved in a patch rhythm set or performance In Patch mode effects will be applied according to the settings of each patch For details refer to MFX Switch p 46 Chorus Send Lvl p 46 Reverb Send Lvl p 46 and in the section entitled Patch Tone Parameters You will not hear the effe
120. RS 50 VALUE 0 127 Hold Pedal Hold Pedal Polarity Select the polarity of the Hold pedal On some pedals the electrical signal output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the opposite of other pedals If your pedal has an effect opposite of what you expect set this parameter to REVERSE If you are using a Roland pedal that has no polarity switch set this parameter to STANDARD VALUE STANDARD REVERSE Local Control Local Controller The Local Controller determines whether the internal sound generator is disconnected OFF from the keyboard controller section Keyboard pitch bend modulation lever knobs buttons D Beam controller pedal and so on or not disconnected ON Normally this is left ON but if you wish to use the RS 50 s keyboard and controllers to control only external sound modules set it to OFF VALUE OFF ON Clock Source Select MIDI if you want synchronization related MIDI messages to be received from an external sequencer Select INT if you want to synchronize to the RS 50 s internal tempo The multi effect changes will also synchronize to this setting VALUE INT MIDI Settings related to controllers CONTROLLER Mod Modulation Assign You can use the modulation lever to apply the following effects other than vibrato Value Tx CC Function Parameter Changed MODULATION CCO0I1 Vibrato PORTA TIM
121. Rhythm Sets Rhythm Sets 2 Performances Performances 8 Arpeggio Templates 8 Arpeggio Templates Arpeggio Styles Multichord Sets 8 Multichord Sets Select Select Save Temporary Area All data stored in the user area can be stored on an external MEM sequencer p 98 If you load the saved data back into the RS 50 all settings of the entire RS 50 will return to the state by they were in when the data was saved Temporary memory Temporary area This is the area that holds the data for the patch or the like that you ve selected using the panel buttons When you play the keyboard or play back an external sequence sound is produced based on data in the temporary area When you edit a patch you do not directly modify the data in memory rather you call up the data into the temporary area and edit it there Settings in the temporary area are temporary and will be lost when the power is turned off or when you select another setting To keep the settings you have modified you must write them into rewritable memory Rewritable memory System memory System memory stores system parameter settings that determine how the RS 50 functions User memory User memory is where you normally store the data you need USER memory contains 128 patches 2 rhythm sets 8 performances Non rewritable memory Preset memory Data in Preset memory cannot be rewritten Howev
122. Roland WEI Owner s Manual Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the Roland RS 50 Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled USING THE UNIT SAFELY p 2 3 and IMPORTANT NOTES p 4 5 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit Owner s manual should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a conve nient reference Roland e RS 50 S Copyright 2003 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION z 6 Ou SES EI For the U K IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Unde
123. S SAN E o SINGLE 288 _ Wr05 Jublag HONRA ark SINGLE 355 Br49 RS Alto Sax SAX 65 01 SINGLE B8 283 i ee PR fe WT AE SEDE 356 Br50 AltoSax Sft SAX 65 2 SINGLE le wee eme mrs el M 358 Br52 RS Tnr Sax SAX 65 TTE NEP NES 2 SINGLE Ee 29052 Wi Nay BTM 2082 kool EE 2 A SINGLE 359 Br53 Blown Tenor SAX 65 osi Le SINGLE 293 Wr10 AEx CelticFl ETH 6 2 TI 2 DUAL 360 mrs RS Bari Sax eux E de o SINGLE ZOA NEL Santur PURG 90 26 SINGLE 361 Br55 Trumpet BRS 67 a o 57 2 SINGLE 225 Weld Harp FUR OP Tb id SINGLE 362 Br56 Dark Trumpet BRS 67 22 57 SINGLE 296 WES Yang Qin BTS Reip dea ud oxo SIGHS 363 Br57 Trombone BRS 67 235 0 58 SINGLE EE EE SS 78 SINGLE 364 Br58 Trombone 2 BRS 67 24 58 SINGLE 295 ds etta EER E a o SINGLE 365 Br59 Bright Tb BRS 67 25 2 58 SINGLE 299 ne Tt PLK 68 66 1 05 2 SINGLE ace mee Taka BRS a SSC 59 SINGLE 909 W1 Banos FRE 167 9 06 SINGLE 367 Br 6l MutedTrumpet BRS 67 7 0 60 SINGLE OL NEL Ee ui E 9 ui SINGEE 368 Br62 MuteTrumpet2 BRS 67 28 60 SINGLE 20 NEIN EROUD EH spes ee 9 Ub 2 SINGLE 369 Br63 French Horns BRS 68 1 0 61 SINGLE 308 W 20 Taisho Koto PLK 68 70 1 08 2 SINGLE S70 mei E Hom2 BRS 5 a 3 SINGLE 304 Wr21 Kalimba PLK 68 71 0 09 SINGLE Am lke nme eps Ge 3 Ge 2 SINGLE 305 W 22 Bagpipe ETH 68 72 0 10 2 SINGLE 3 nee es BRS E i E 2 SINGLE See E 0 ee SINE 373 Bro7
124. Surdo Open EXC6 1 Barr oL MORE ee A LEE rsen Applause 2 EXC Percussion sound of the same number will not be heard at the same time PC Program Number Rh16 Rh20 MSB 120 LSB 000 119 Performance list No Name No Name No Name No Name 01 Pop 1 11 Funk 2 21 House 2 31 Reggae 2 02 Pop 2 12 Jazz 1 22 Hip Hop 1 32 SEQ Template 03 Pop 3 13 Jazz 2 23 Hip Hop 2 04 Pop 4 14 Bossa 24 R amp B 1 05 Pop 5 15 Orchestra 25 R amp B 2 06 Rock 1 16 Techno 1 26 Drum n Bass 1 07 Rock 2 17 Techno 2 27 Drum n Bass 2 08 Contmporary1 18 Trance 1 28 BreakBeats 1 09 Contmporary2 19 Trance 2 29 BreakBeats 2 10 Funk 1 20 House 1 30 Reggae 1 Rhythm guide list No Name No Name No Name No Name 01 Pop 1 11 Rock 2 21 Techno 2 31 Reggae 1 02 Pop 2 12 Rock 3 22 Trance 1 32 Reggae 2 03 Pop 3 13 Contmporary1 23 Trance 2 Metronm 4 4 04 Pop 4 Bld 14 Contmporary2 24 House 1 Metronm 2 4 05 Pop 5 Shfl 15 Funk 1 25 House 2 Metronm 3 4 06 Pop 6 Shfl 16 Funk 2 26 Hip Hop 1 07 Pop 7 Vari 17 Jazz 1 27 Hip Hop 2 08 Pop 8 Vari 18 Jazz 2 28 R amp B 1 09 Pop 9 Vari 19 Bossa 29 R amp B 2 10 Rock 1 20 Techno 1 30 Drum n Bass d Bld Ballad Shfl Shuffle V
125. Synth Brassi SBR 68 5 0 63 2 SINGLE 374 Br68 JP Brass SBR 68 6 63 2 SINGLE 375 Br69 OctSynBrass SBR 68 7 2 65 2 SINGLE 6 BRASS 376 Br70 Jump Brass SBR 68 8 3 63 1 SINGLE 377 Br71 Synth Brass2 SBR 68 9 0 64 2 SINGLE No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2 Patch Select Voice Key 378 Br72 SynBrass siz SBR 68 10 6A 2 SINGLE gory MSB 87 MSB 121 Mode 379 Br73 Velo Brass 1 SBR 6 i 2 64 2 SINGLE ESB PC ESB Pe 380 Br74 Soprano Sax SAX 68 12 0 65 1 SINGLE 207 BeQl RS Brass 1 BRS SU ST Oel Us B DUAE 381 Br75 Alto Sax SAX 68 13 0 66 1 SINGLE 20551 Bro RS Brags 2 PRS POTR ea E 2 SINGLE 382 Br76 Tenor Sax SAX 68 14 0 67 1 SINGLE 209 1 BOSE RS Blass d BRS 9 E 4 SINGLE xS 577 Baritone Sax SAX 68 15 0 68 1 SINGLE 310 Br04 RS Brass 4 BRS 6 5 2 SINGLE 311 Br05 RS Brass 5 BRS 6 5 2 SINGLE 312 Br06 Tp amp TbSecti BRS 6 5 TI 2 SINCE 7 VOCAL amp PAD 313 Br07 Tp amp TbSect2 BRS 6 5 2 SINGLE 314 Br08 Tp Sect BRS 65 60 1 SINGLE No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2 Patch Select Voice Key 315 Br09 Tb Sect BRS 65 61 1 SINGLE gory MSB 87 MSB 121 Mode 316 Br10 Brass sfz BRS 65 62 2 SINGLE LSB PC LSB PC 317 Brll StSax Sect BRS 6 Teil 2 SINGLE 384 VoOl Jazz Scat VOX 65 077 Seu e 1 SINGLE 318 Bri2 AEx UniTp Tb BRS 6 Tel TI 2 DUAL 385 Vo02 RSVoxOohs VOX 65 08
126. T Speeds up the rotation to the specified speed the Low Fast Hi Fast values When you want to use the ped al switch to switch the Rotary ro tation speed select MFX PARAMETER in Pedal Control Assign p 90 High Accel 0 15 Adjusts the time it takes the high frequency rotor to reach the newly selected speed when switching from fast to slow or slow to fast speed Lower values will require long er times Low Accel 0 15 Adjusts the time it takes the low frequency rotor to reach the newly selected speed when switching from fast to slow or slow to fast speed Lower values will require longer times High Level 0 127 Adjusts the volume of the high frequency rotor Low Level 0 127 Adjusts the volume of the low frequency rotor Separation 0 127 Adjusts the spatial dispersion of the sound Level 08 ROTARY The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rotary speakers often used with the electric organs of the past Since the movement of the high range and low range rotors can be set independently the unique type of modulation characteristic of these speakers can be simulated quite closely This effect is most suitable for electric organ Patches L in L out p Rin R out Parameter Value Description High Slow 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the slow speed SLOW of the high frequency rotor Low Slow 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the slow sp
127. TY E 34 D BEAM SENS eote ae netten ter Rat 34 Decay Time EE a EAEE ESEE AR 28 Patch Tone Parameters A 48 Delay Zeg dmm tant rS 86 Delay Feedback nee epe peres 87 Demo songs ENEE 18 IR EE 87 DESTINATION TONE L 4 eee 26 Device ID Device ID Number AAA 91 E Edit Performance Settings sssssssssses 55 Effect Signal Path piei asiente tai iia 66 tte eer enr eet bea dee 41 65 ENT ziehe ee etn ep REP 42 Envelopes itai degen egere pd 48 Exclusive messages ee 93 ExpressionDst Expression Destination 46 F FACTORY RESET eese 17 Patch WE E ne erem eitis 51 Performance Utility sss 61 Feedback etie etm ees 86 iil 47 Filter LFO Filter LFO Switch ee 47 Fije T ne teuer Pi ert tet etd 47 G GENERALE 4 1 HR er di 89 General MIDI eese eene nenne 9 General MIZ dep en Ta eet 9 H Hold Arpeggio Hold Switch s 63 Hold Pedal Hold Pedal Polarity 89 l Input Numbers and numerals AAA 43 K Kbd Velocity Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity 63 Key Mode sineren mna e a a Ee 44 45 Key Trigger Arpeggio Key Trigger 63 L LCD Contrast ognuno rer 16 89 Level Chorus Level 2 e e 86 Part Level s eine erento ee 56 Performance Level AE 56 Reverb Level cete eee endis 87 Rhythm Tone eoo ome nemen 52 Ee PEE E RR ERE 27 47 DBEODelay eco a sa 47 LEO Dep
128. The following four parameters can be copied Effect related parameters can also be copied from a patch PART Copy settings made for each part p 56 e MFX Copy multi effect settings CHORUS Copy chorus settings REVERB Copy reverb settings Copying settings made for each part of a performance Press PERFORN so it is lit and you are in Performance mode Select the copy destination performance o o oO E G E s o n Press UTILITY Use PAGE CURSOR a H to select 1 PERFORM PRM COPY Press ENTER Use VALUE to select PART Press PAGE CURSOR Use VALUE to select the copy source performance 59 Playing more than one sound simultaneously Performance mode 7 Press PAGE CURSOR Use VALUE to specify the copy source part MEM You can also select the part by pressing 0 9 or by holding down SHIFT and pressing 1 6 8 Press PAGE CURSOR Use VALUE to specify the copy destination part MEM You can also select the part by pressing 0 9 or by holding down SHIFT and pressing 1 6 9 Press ENTER Settings made for each part of the performance will be copied to the currently selected performance When the display indicates COMPLETED the copy operation has been completed Copying effect settings 1 Press PERFORM so it is l
129. Using sequencer software modulation lever and knob movements have no effect on the sound Some types of sequencer software may not allow Soft Thru i e data received at the MIDI IN connector is not sent from the MIDI OUT connector as is for Exclusive messages When recording Exclusive messages with such sequencer software set Local Control to ON p 89 Error Messages Messages Message Meaning Action Checksum Error The checksum of a received System Exclusive mes sage was incorrect Set the correct checksum value MIDI Buffer Full Due to an inordinate volume of MIDI messages re ceived the RS 50 has failed to process them properly Reduce the amount of MIDI messages to be transmit ted MIDI Communication Error A problem has occurred with the MIDI cable connec tions Check that MIDI cables are not broken or pulled out Receive Data Error A MIDI message was received incorrectly If thesame error message is displayed repeatedly the problem lies with the MIDI messages that are being transmitted to the RS 50 User Memory Damaged The data in user memory has been lost Use the Factory Reset function to initialize the mem ory to the factory settings CANCELED Processing is canceled This is not an error message 105 Appendix Parameter list Patch parameters Patches Patch Common parameters p 45
130. W Level 0 127 0 0 100 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the reverb sound is heard Pre Delay Gate Time 5 500 ms Adjusts the time from when the reverb is heard until when it dis appears Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency D100 0W D0 100W Balance Adjusts the volume balance be tween the direct sound and the reverb sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the reverb sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 27 OD CHORUS Overdrive Chorus This effect connects an overdrive and a chorus in series L in O L out Balance D LI Balance W O R out Balance D Rin Parameter Value Description OD Drive 0 127 Adjusts the degree of overdrive distortion The volume will change togeth er with the degree of distortion OD Pan L64 63R Adjusts the stereo location of the overdrive sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Adjusts the output level 28 OD gt FLANGER Overdrive Flanger This effect connects an overdrive and a flanger in series Balance D L out O Feedback r 4 Flanger O R out Balance D Lin Balance W Rin Par
131. XIT MEM User performances will be displayed after the end of the preset performances You can hold down SHIFT and use PAGE CURSOR lt to switch between display of user and preset performances Editing the settings of a performance The performances of the RS 50 contain settings that are made for the entire performance and settings that are made individually for each part of the performance Settings made for the entire performance are Settings made individually for each part of the performance are Making settings that apply to the entire performance Settings for the entire performance such as the performance name p 55 Effect settings for the performance p 56 Performance part settings p 56 Effect settings for performance parts p 58 o o s oO E G E s o n 1 Press PERFORM so it is lit and you are in Performance mode Select a performance 3 Press PARAM so it is lit 4 Use PAGE CURSOR lt to select a parameter and use VALUE to specify its value You can modify the following parameters gx To save the edited performance refer to Saving a performance p 59 55 Playing more than one sound simultaneously Performance mode Making settings that apply to the entire performance Performance Common Parameters Name Performance Name You can change the name of the performance Here you can u
132. ZECH REP K AUDIO Kardasovska 626 CZ 198 00 Praha 9 CZECH REP TEL 2 666 10529 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 3916 6200 FRANCE Roland France SA 4 Rue Paul Henri SPAAK Parc de l Esplanade F 77 462 St Thibault Lagny Cedex FRANCE TEL 01 600 73 500 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN 01510 Vantaa FINLAND TEL 0 9 68 24 020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland G2 Calmount Park Calmount Avenue Dublin 12 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 4294444 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 2273 0074 POLAND MX MUSIC SP Z O O UL Gibraltarska 4 PL 03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Tecnologias Musica e Audio Roland Portugal S A Cais Das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 PORTO PORTUGAL TEL 022 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 535500 Gheorgheni ROMANIA TEL 266 364
133. abasa 1 Cabasa 1 Cabasa 1 Cabasa 1 Jetplane 2 EN TR808Maracas 1 Maracas 1 Maracas 1 Maracas 1 Helicopter 1 ShortWhistle EXC2 1 ShortWhistle EXC2 1 ShortWhistle EXC2 1 ShortWhistle EXC2 1 Starship 2 C5l72 Long Whistle EXC2 1 Long Whistle EXC2 1 Long Whistle EXC2 1 Long Whistle EXC2 1 Gun Shot 1 al Guiro Short EXC3 1 Guiro Short EXC3 1 Guiro Short EXC3 1 Guiro Short EXC3 1 Machine Gun 1 74 Guiro Long EXC3 1 Guiro Long EXC3 1 Guiro Long EXC3 1 Guiro Long EXC3 1 Lasergun 1 CEO R808 Clave 1 Claves 1 Claves 1 Claves 1 Explosion 2 76 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Dog 1 77 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Horse Gallop 1 LEN Cuica Mute EXC4 1 Cuica Mute Exc4 1 Cuica Mute Exc4 1 Cuica Mute Exc4 1 Bird 1 2 79 Cuica Open EXC4 1 Cuica Open EXC4 1 Cuica Open EXC4 1 Cuica Open EXC4 1 Rain 1 i Triangl Mt 1 EXC5 1 Triangl Mt 1 EXC5 1 Triangl Mt 1 EXC5 1 Triangl Mt 1 EXC5 1 Thunder 1 81 Triangl Op 1 EXC5 1 Triangl Op 1 EXC5 1 Triangl Op 1 EXC5 1 Triangl Op 1 EXC5 1 Wind 1 m 82 Shaker 1 1 Shaker 1 1 Shaker 1 1 Shaker 1 1 Seashore 1 8 Jingle Bell 1 Jingle Bell 1 Jingle Bell 1 Jingle Bell 1_ Stream 2 C6la4 Bell Tree 1 Bell Tree 1 Bell Tree 1 Bell Tree 1 Bubble 2 ES Castanets 1 Castanets 1 Castanets 1 Castanets 1 86 Surdo Mute EXC6 1 Surdo Mute EXC6 1 Surdo Mute EXC6 1 Surdo Mute EXC6 1 CEA Surdo Open EXC6 1 Surdo Open EXC6 1 Surdo Open EXC6 1
134. ack X Step Flanger a Q Balance W ume A Balance D Lin Parameter Value Description Pre Delay 0 0 100 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the rate of modulation Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of modula tion Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the amount of the flanger sound that is returned fed back into the input Negative settings will invert the phase Step Rate 0 1 20 0 Hz note 2 Adjusts the rate period of pitch change Phase 0 180 deg Adjusts the spatial spread of the sound D100 0W D0 100W Balance Adjusts the volume balance be tween the direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Reset OFF ON This setting determines whether the period for the pattern is reset ON or not OFF when sounds are played While the rhythm guide is play ing the period for the pattern is not reset even if you set this ON Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 17 St DELAY Stereo Delay This is a stereo delay When Feedback Mode is NORMAL Lin Feedback Feedback Feedback Feedback Parameter Value Description Feedback Mode NORMAL CROSS Selects the way in which delay
135. actory Reset operation p 17 1 Press PATCH so it is lit and you are in Patch mode 2 Select the rhythm set that contains the rhythm tone you want to initialize 3 Press UTILITY 4 Use PAGE CURSOR lt to select 2 RHY INITIALIZE 5 Press ENTER 6 Use VALUE to select the rhythm tone that you want to initialize VALUE A 0 key 21 C 8 key 108 You can also press a key to select the rhythm tone to edit 7 Press ENTER once again to execute When initialization is finished the display will indicate COMPLETED This ends the procedure Erasing a rhythm set you saved RHY REMOVE This operation erases the specified user rhythm set When you erase a rhythm set it will no longer be possible to select the rhythm set of that number If you newly save a rhythm set in that number you will again be able to select it 1 Press PATCH so it is lit and you are in Patch mode Press UTILITY Use PAGE CURSOR a to select 3 RHY REMOVE A OMN Press ENTER 5 Use VALUE to select the user rhythm set that you want to erase 6 Press ENTER When the data has been erased the display will indicate COMPLETED This ends the procedure Refer to Creating a Patch Patch Mode p 51 about Transmitting patch rhythm settings from the MIDI OUT connector XFER to MIDI or Restoring the factory settings FACTORY RESET Playing more than
136. adphones plug them into the PHONES jack Connect pedal switches or expression pedals as necessary If you want to know how to make the connections with another external device refer to Using the RS 50 to play an external MIDI sound module p 93 Playing the RS 50 s sound generator from an external MIDI device p 94 Recording to an external sequencer p 96 Turning on off the power Turning on the power 6 o 1 Before turning on the RS 50 s power check the following Once the connections have been completed p 14 Are all devices connected properly turn on power to your Are the volume controls of the RS 50 and any other connected equipment y MERE S Sc various devices in the order turned to the minimum position Is the AC adapter correctly connected to the RS 50 gessi py gue om devices in the wrong order ou risk causin 2 Press the power switch on the rear panel of the RS 50 to turn on the power A o S malfunction and or damage to speakers and other devices POWER ON E OFF NOTE This unit is equipped with a protection circuit A brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate 3 Turn on the power of the connected audio devices normally 4 Play the RS 50 s keyboard and gradually raise the volume controls of the RS 50 or the connected audio equipment to an appropriate volume level Nore Turn up the RS 50 s volume level carefully Excessive volume
137. ains two or more settings In cases such as the page shown below use PAGE CURSOR a Ip to switch between A B and C and use VALUE to modify the value of each parameter Example Master effect switch A B C Inputting numbers and numerais On the RS 50 you can select a patch performance number or input a numerical value by using VALUE or by using NUMERIC 0 9 to input the value directly c 9 S g bg Q 9 E n d 24 1 Press NUMERIC so it is lit The indication will blink 2 Use the 0 9 buttons to input the number Pressing 0 while holding down SHIFT switches the status 3 If you want to finalize the value press ENTER The value will be finalized and NUMERIC will go out If you decide to cancel press EXIT Selecting a part On the RS 50 you can use 0 9 to select parts There are a total of sixteen parts Select parts as follows 1 Press PERFORM so it is lit and you are in Performance mode 2 Press PART SELECT so it is lit 3 Press the button as described below Part 1 1 Part 11 SHIFT and 1 Part 2 2 Part 12 SHIFT and 2 Part 3 3 Part 13 SHIFT and 3 Part 4 4 Part 14 SHIFT and 4 Part 5 5 Part 15 Part 6 6 Part 16 SHIFT and 5 SHIFT and 6 Part 7 7 Part 8 8 Part 9 9 Part 10 0 43 Creating a patch Patch mode To create a sound patch of
138. ameter Value OD Drive 0 127 Description Adjusts the degree of overdrive distortion The volume will change togeth er with the degree of distortion Adjusts the stereo location of the overdrive sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the modulation speed of the flanger effect Adjusts the modulation depth of the flanger effect Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase OD Pan L64 63R Flg Delay 0 0 100 ms Flg Rate Flg Depth 0 127 Flg Feedback 98 98 79 Effects Parameter Value Description Flg Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the overdrive sound that is sent through the flanger and the overdrive sound that is not sent through the flanger With a setting of D100 0W only the overdrive sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the overdrive sound that is sent through the flanger will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 29 OD DELAY Overdrive Delay This effect connects an overdrive and a delay in series L in Rin Balance D pex CY Balance W Feedback O R out Balance D f Balance W P
139. an be simultaneously controlled using the controller marked with the same number Here you can exchange these assignments or choose not to use them For details refer to p 33 p 89 Value OFF Multi effect control will not be used Items with a symbol Ctrl1 or Ctrl2 These differ depending on the multi effect type The parameters that can be assigned to 00 THROUGH Effects are not applied Select when creating Patches or Rhythm Sets that do not use multi effects 01 STEREO EQ Stereo Equalizer This is a four band stereo equalizer low mid x 2 high L in 4 Band EQ L out Rin 4 Band EQ R out Parameter Value Description Low Freq 200 400 Hz Selects the frequency of the low range Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Freq 2000 4000 8000 Selects the frequency of the high Hz range High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Mid1 Freq 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the frequency of Middle 1 mid range Mid1 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 This parameter adjusts the 8 0 width of the area around the Middle 1 Frequency that will be affected by the Gain setting Higher values of Q will result in a narrower area being affected Parameter Value Description Mid1 Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain for the area specified by the Middle 1 Fre quency and Q settings Mid2 Freq 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the fre
140. ances simultaneously Current part The current part is the part that will sound when you play the keyboard The RS 50 has a total of sixteen parts For details on how to switch the current part refer to Selecting a part p 43 Overview of the RS 50 Effects Effects let you apply a variety of special effects to patches or rhythm sets You can use three effects simultaneously chorus which adds depth and spaciousness reverb which adds reverberation multi effects each selectable from 47 types such as equalizer overdrive and delay Number of voices Maximum polyphony The sound generator of the RS 50 can produce up to 64 notes voices simultaneously If data is received that attempts to play more than this number of voices notes will be dropped out When the number of requested voices exceeds 64 the RS 50 will give priority to the later played notes and will consecutively turn off the sounding notes An appropriate Voice Reserve setting should be made with respect to any Parts that you cannot do without p 56 US Some Tones use more than two voices to create a single Tone For the number of voices used by each Tone refer to Original tone list p 109 About memory Patch and performance settings are stored in what is referred to as memory There are three kinds of memory temporary rewritable and non rewritable System Presets User Patches Patches 128
141. and upper tones are divided p 45 DUAL The upper and lower tones are layered Editing the patch parameters 1 Press PATCH so it is lit and you are in Patch mode 2 Select a patch 3 Press PARAM so it is lit Now you can edit the patch parameters Use PAGE CURSOR a to select the parameter that you want to edit Ex Selecting patch parameters p 45 4 If there is an editable parameter the cursor underline will blink below its value Now you can use VALUE to modify the value of that patch parameter cursor Selecting patch parameters PATCH COMMON SHIFT PAGE CURSOR gt mum SHIFT PAGE CURSOR gt E PAGE CURSOR p gt PATCH TONE PAGE CURSOR gt PAGE CURSOR Tal PAGE CURSOR p gt d Suen en ech PAGE CURSOR Tal PAGE CURSOR 4 PAGE CURSOR gt PAGE CURSOR 4 PAGE CURSOR gt nn DTD PAGE CURSOR 44 Creating a patch Patch mode d SHIFT PAGE CURSOR al I SHIFT PAGE CURSOR al Making settings that apply to the entire patch Patch Common parameters You can edit the following Patch Common parameters Name Patch Name You can change the name of the patch Here you can use PAGE CURSOR lt to move through the
142. arameter Value Description OD Drive 0 127 Adjusts the degree of overdrive distortion The volume will change togeth er with the degree of distortion OD Pan L64 63R Adjusts the stereo location of the overdrive sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Delay Time 0 500 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the delay sound is heard Dly Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Dly HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS Adjusts the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feed back set this parameter to BY PASS Dly Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the overdrive sound that is sent through the delay and the overdrive sound that is not sent through the delay With a setting of D100 0W only the overdrive sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the overdrive sound that is sent through the delay will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 30 DIST CHORUS Distortion Chorus This effect connects distortion and chorus in series The parameters are essentially the same as 27 OD gt CHORUS with the exception of the following two O
143. ari Variation Arpeggio template list Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Ac Piano 1 Piano Phr 1 Bell 1 Bell Phr 1 Accordion T ACD Phr 1 El Guitar 1 E Gt Phr 1 2 Piano Phr 2 2 Bell Phr 2 2 ACD Phr 2 2 E Gt Phr 2 3 Piano Phr 3 3 Bell Phr 3 3 ACD Phr 3 3 E Gt Phr 3 4 Piano Phr 4 4 Bell Phr 4 4 ACD Phr 4 4 E Gt Phr 4 5 Piano Phr 5 5 Bell Phr 5 5 ACD Arp 1 5 E Gt Phr 5 6 Piano Arp 1 6 Bell Arp 1 6 ACD Arp 2 6 E Gt Arp 1 7 Piano Arp 2 7 Bell Arp 2 7 ACD Arp3 7 E Gt Arp2 8 Piano Arp 3 8 Bell Arp 3 8 ACD Arp 4 8 E Gt Arp 3 9 Piano Arp 4 9 Bell Arp 4 9 ACD Arp 5 9 E Gt Arp 4 Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name El Piano 1 E Piano Phr1 Mallet 1 Marimba Phr1 Harmonica 1 HRM Phr Dist Gui 1 D Gt Phr 1 2 E Piano Phr2 2 Marimba Phr2 2 HRM Phr 2 tar 2 D Gt Phr2 3 E Piano Phr3 3 Xylophne Phr 3 HRM Phr 3 3 D Gt Phr 3 4 E Piano Phr4 4 Vibrphne Phr 4 HRM Phr 4 4 D Gt Phr 4 5 E Piano Phr5 5 Steel Dr Phr 5 HR
144. ata Switch 91 Tx Prog Chg Transmit Program Change Switch 90 Type Chorus Type essere 86 Multi Effects Type sss 68 Part Scale Tune Type sees 58 Patch Scale Tune Type 91 Reverb Type seeen 87 U Upper tone Anine REL Td 40 User Chord Det entere ai 64 User Rhythm Set ase dne tete thee one 53 User Template eee eee Re dien 62 User Template Parameters E 62 V Variation Arpeggio Variation sss 62 Velo Sens Depth Velocity Sensitivity Depth 47 Velo Sens Ofs Velocity Sensitivity Offset 47 Vibrato Effect eec tte ettet tnn 27 Voice Rsv 1 16 Voice Reserve 1 16 56 Volume Balance 1 csse 26 W Wah hees 27 X XFER to MIDI Pateh CHE 51 Performance Utility sss 61 128 129 130 For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89 336 EEC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions
145. ate parameter list Style Arpeggio Style Specifies the basic way in which the arpeggio will be played US For details regarding Arpeggio Style refer to Arpeggio style list p 122 Variation Arpeggio Variation The arpeggiator provides several variations performance patterns for each arpeggio style This parameter selects the variation number The number of variations will differ according to the arpeggio style Motif Arpeggio Motif Sets the order in which notes of the chord will sound VALUE UP Notes you press will be sounded beginning from low to high DOWN Notes you press will be sounded from high to low UP amp DOWN Notes you press will be sounded from low to high and then back down from high to low RANDOM NOTE ORDER Notes you press will be sounded in the order in which you pressed them By pressing the notes in Notes you press will be sounded in random order the appropriate order you can produce melody lines Up to 128 notes will be remembered GLISSANDO Each chromatic step between the highest and lowest notes you press will sound in succession repeating upward and downward Press only the lowest and the highest notes CHORD All notes you press will sound simultaneously AUTO1 The timing at which keys will sound will be assigned automatically giving priority to the lowest key that was pressed AUTO2 The timing at which keys will sound will be assigned automatically giving priority
146. ce again so it goes out Creating your own arpeggio template User Template You can create your own arpeggio template by editing the parameters of one of the preset templates Your newly created template can be stored as one of eight user templates 1 Press PHRASE ARPEGGIO so it is lit 2 Press 0 9 to select a template that produces arpeggios similar to what you want to create Pressing 0 will select the user template you have created You can then use VALUE to select other user templates 3 Press PARAM so it is lit Now you can edit the arpeggio parameters 4 Use PAGE CURSOR lt gt to move the cursor and use VALUE to specify the value For details on the types and values of the parameters refer to the following section User template parameter list p 62 5 When you are finished editing parameters press WRITE Use VALUE to specify the number UserTemplate 1 8 at which to save the user template ore Be aware that if you choose a number in which a user template has already been saved the previously saved settings will be overwritten and lost 6 Press ENTER When the user template has been saved the display will indicate COMPLETED Nem If you decide not to save the user template press EXIT Now when you use the arpeggiator you can press 0 and select the user template you just saved User templ
147. ch this device microphones connected to it or the metal portions of other objects such as guitars This is due to an infinitesimal electrical charge which is absolutely harmless However if you are concerned about this connect the ground terminal see figure with an external ground When the unit is grounded a slight hum may occur depending on the particulars of your installation If you are unsure of the connection method contact the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page Unsuitable places for connection Water pipes may result in shock or electrocution Gas pipes may result in fire or explosion Telephone line ground or lightning rod may be dangerous in the event of lightning 13 Getting ready Connecting the RS 50 to external equipment The RS 50 does not contain an amp or speaker You ll need to listen to it through powered monitors a mixer and connected monitors a stereo system or through NOTE headphones To prevent malfunction Connect as follows when using the RS 50 as a stand alone device and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making Stereo headphones any connections To prevent the inadvertent disruption of power to your unit should the plug be pulled out accidentally and to avoid applying undue stress to the AC adaptor
148. cts if the send level to chorus reverb is too low or if the MFX Switch is off If you cannot hear the results of your editing the effect settings check the settings listed above In Performance mode effects will be applied according to the settings of each patch as well as the settings of each part For details refer to MFX Switch p 58 Chorus Send Lvl p 58 Reverb Send Lvl p 58 and in the section entitled Part Effect Parameters Each effect is shared by all parts patches When using the multi effect in Performance mode you will normally apply the multi effect using the effect settings stored by the performance However if desired you can set the performance parameter MFX Source p 56 so that the effect settings stored by the patch assigned to a part are used by all parts When you edit the multi effect settings check MFX Source to see which of the above you are editing Torning the effect function on and of MASTER EFFECT SWITCH In order to enable an effects processor multi effects chorus reverb turn its switch on Turn these settings off when you wish to listen to the unprocessed sound as you create a sound or when you wish to use an external effects processor instead of the onboard effects The On Off settings for each Effect affect the RS 50 as a whole i e are system settings This setting remains stored in memory even while the power is off When shipped from the factory all three ef
149. d set User Chord Set EE 64 Adding effects cisrenan hia sa i da a EE Unis nre Dr Ra Fes edad rrr Ia agen 65 Turning the effect function on and off MASTER EFFECT SWITCH een 65 Th effectsignal path s eere Se tee pte une enis t e a tete eg digas 66 Making effecisse E aS r E a r ae E aa e Aa A a E TERESE E 67 Setting multi effects parameters sermi eoi een ibn HERE SA eE de HR oe qe n ei SaR a 68 Making chorus settings need Atene gebe RH ORE Hte Ud e nin s 86 Making reverb E 87 Settings common to all modes System Function 88 How to make the system function set ngs EE 88 Functions of the system parameters EE teens 89 Settings common to the entire system GENERAL sse 89 Settings related to controllers CONTROLLER seen eene nnne 89 Settings related to MIDI MIDI itte tret eren terti debe det 90 Making scale tune settings for a patch PATCH SCALE 91 Performing with an external MIDI device 92 EE 92 MIDI messages used by the RG een 92 Using the RS 50 to play an external MIDI sound modyule sss 93 Connecting to external MIDI sound modules eneen 93 Set the keyboard transmit channel ssssssssssssssseseeeeneerenereetetenes 94 Playing the RS 50 s sound generator from an external MIDI deviece sss 94 Connecting an external MIDI device EE 94 Setting the patch receive channel 95 Settin
150. e Be aware that if you choose a number in which a user patch has already been saved the previously saved settings will be overwritten and lost 4 Press ENTER 5 Use VALUE to specify the category for the user patch you want to save s more about the category refer to Patch categories p 49 6 Press ENTER once again to execute When the patch has been saved the display will indicate COMPLETED If there are more patches that have been edited the parts that use such patches will be shown in a consecutive manner Repeat steps 3 6 7 Once all the necessary patches have been saved you are returned to the screen you were in at step 1 8 Press ENTER When the user performance has been saved the display will indicate COMPLETED MEM If you decide not to save the user performance press EXIT If you do not change Name Performance Name p 56 the performance will have the same name as the one you have been editing Convenient functions for performance editing Performance Utility Performance Utility provides various functions that you will find convenient when editing performances allowing you to do things such as copy or initialize a performance Copying part or effect parameters PERFORM PRM COPY This operation copies the settings of a specified performance to the current performance By using this you can edit more efficiently
151. e Note on Note off MODE mE NM PATCH MODIFY PHRASE PATCH PERFORM DEMO PARAM EFFECTS vue ARPEGGIO vate _s a O M acm 53 BALANCE BALANCE RATE LFO DEPTH SYSTEM SELECT AUDITION WRITE oer ocT a CURSOR gt PESTONE ON OOO OO 5 O ent e cubr nesolawce RHYTHM Numeric a a SHIFT O a a a a a l i l l Ls u u O CH Sei PIANO GB mum oncu o SYNTH 1 Press the patch modify select button so the ENV indicator is lit 2 Turnthe ATTACK knob Turning this to the right clockwise increases the time it takes for the sound to rise while turning it to the left counterclockwise shortens this time 3 Turnthe DECAY knob Turning this to the right increases the time it takes for the sound to reach the Sustain Level while turning it to the left shortens this time 4 Turn the RELEASE knob Turning this to the right increases the time it takes for the sound to disappear while turning it to the left shortens this time 28 Applying various effects to the sound E Changing the brightness of the sound and adding special qualities CUTOFF RESONANCE The sound generator section of the RS 50 contains a filter that can cut or boost specific frequency regions of the sound CUTOFF specifies the frequency cutoff frequency at which the filter will begin to modify the sound and RESONANCE
152. e overtones generated by the en hancer are combined with the direct sound Cho Delay 0 0 100 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard Cho Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the modulation speed of the chorus effect Cho Depth 0 127 Adjusts the modulation depth of the chorus effect Cho Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the enhancer sound that is sent through the chorus and the enhancer sound that is not sent through the chorus With a setting of D100 0W only the enhancer sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the enhancer sound that is sent through the chorus will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 34 ENH gt FLANGER Enhancer Flanger This effect connects an enhancer and a flanger in series L in Feedback Balance W O R out Balance D O L out Rin Mix Balance D Parameter Value Description Enhancer Sens 0 127 Adjusts the sensitivity of the en hancer Enhancer Mix 0 127 Adjusts the ratio with which the overtones generated by the en hancer are combined with the direct sound Flg Delay 0 0 100 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flg Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the modulation speed of the flanger effect Flg
153. e EP EP 64 23 1 SINGLE 083 Ky23 RS Vibe MLT 64 65 2 SINGLE 024 Pf24 EP Panner EP 64 24 2 SINGLE 084 Ky24 SA Vibe MLT 64 66 1 SINGLE 025 Pf25 Tremolo Dyno EP 64 25 2 SINGLE 085 Ky25 RS Vibe Achs MLT 64 67 2 SPLIT 026 Pf26 RS Rhodes 2 EP 64 26 1 SINGLE 086 Ky26 RS Organ 1 ORG 64 68 3 SINGLE 027 Pf27 MKS20 Rhds 1 EP 64 27 2 SINGLE 087 Ky27 RS Organ 2 ORG 64 69 3 SINGLE x 028 P28 MKS20 Rhds 2 EP 64 28 2 SINGLE 088 Ky28 RS Organ 3 ORG 64 70 1 SINGLE 9 029 Pf29 Touch Rhodes EP 64 29 1 SINGLE 089 Ky29 RS Organ 4 ORG 64 71 1 SINGLE Q 030 Pf30 Phase Rhodes EP 64 30 2 SINGLE 090 Ky30 RS Organ 5 ORG 64 72 3 SINGLE E 031 Pf31 Phase Rhds2 EP 64 31 2 SINGLE 091 Ky31 Jazz Organ 1 ORG 64 73 1 SINGLE 032 Pf32 Phase EP EP 64 32 2 SINGLE 092 Ky32 Jazz Organ 2 ORG 64 74 1 SINGLE 033 Pf33 Psycho Rhds EP 64 33 2 SINGLE 093 Ky33 R amp B Organ ORG 64 75 3 SINGLE 034 Pf34 StageRhds Bs EP 64 34 2 SPLIT 094 Ky34 Power B Slw ORG 64 76 1 SINGLE 035 Pf35 RS Wurly EP 64 35 1 SINGLE 095 Ky35 Power B Fst ORG 64 77 1 SINGLE 036 Pf36 Sine Rhodes EP 64 36 2 SINGLE 096 Ky36 Gospel B ORG 64 78 3 SINGLE 037 Pf37 FM EP EP 64 37 1 SINGLE 097 Ky37 Dist
154. e a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit s memory in another MIDI device e g a sequencer Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored in the unit s memory or in another MIDI device e g a sequencer once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Usea reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially when it is late at night When you need to transport the unit package it in the box including padding that it came in if possible Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials Useonly the specified expression pedal EV 5 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display Note
155. e of the center delay sound Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Adding effects Parameter Value Description HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feed back set this parameter to BY PASS Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the direct sound and the delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the delay sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 22 TM CTRL DLY Time Control Delay You can change the delay time in real time Lengthening the delay will lower the pitch and shortening it will raise the pitch Lin O Balance D Time Control Delay LI Feedback Rin O Balance D Parameter Value Description Delay 0 840 ms Adjusts the time delay from the direct sound until when each de lay sound is heard Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Acce
156. e saved U01 U02 As shown above the display will show only the rhythm set number if nothing has yet been saved to that number yon Be aware that your previously saved settings will be overwritten and lost if you save to a number in which a rhythm set has already been saved 5 Press ENTER Unlike a patch a rhythm set is always saved in the RHYTHM amp SFX category group DRM DRUMS MEM For more about the category group refer to Patch categories p 49 When the rhythm set has been saved the display will indicate COMPLETED This completes the procedure MEMO If you decide not to save the rhythm set press EXIT If you do not change Name Rhythm Set Name p 52 the rhythm set will have the same name as the one you selected in step 2 Convenient functions for rhythm set editing Rhythm Set Utility Rhythm Set Utility provides functions that you will find convenient when editing a rhythm set such as initializing a rhythm tone or copying effect settings Copying effect settings from a rhythm set RHY PRM COPY This operation copies effect settings from an existing rhythm set to the currently selected rhythm set The following three parameters can be copied MFX Copy the multi effect settings CHORUS Copy the chorus settings REVERB Copy the reverb settings 1 Press PATCH so it is lit and you are in Patch mode Select the copy destination rhyth
157. ect sound begins until the delay sound is heard Dly Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the delay input Negative settings will invert the phase Dly HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS Adjusts the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feed back set this parameter to BY PASS Dly Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the chorus sound that is sent through the delay and the chorus sound that is not sent through the delay With a setting of D100 0W only the chorus sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound that is sent through the delay will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 37 FLG gt DELAY Flanger Delay This effect connects a flanger and a delay in series Balance D L in Feedback i Ariana Balance nger ela O CY Balance W O O R out Balance D O CO L out Balance D nr Balance W gt O Balance D Parameter Value Description Flg Delay 0 0 100 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flg Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the modulation speed of the flanger effect Flg Depth 0 127 Adjusts the modulation depth o
158. ecting EE 43 Creating a patch Patch mode eeeeee eere 44 How to make the patch settings tete oboe pde b ed pe e ede eed 44 Changing the way that the tones are sounded Key Mode 44 Editing the patch pDarameterg EE 44 Making settings that apply to the entire patch Patch Common parameters 45 Making settings for an individual tone Patch Tone parameters sss 46 odving a Patches sonos nebenbei etate dii ad dia tte iita ndi ie ts 48 Convenient functions for patch editing Patch Utility sss 49 Copying patch parameters PATCH PRM COPY 49 Initializing the parameters of a patch PATCH INITIALIZE eee 50 Erasing a user patch you saved PATCH REMOVE EE 50 Transmitting patch rhythm set settings from the MIDI OUT connector XFER to MIDI 51 Restoring the factory settings FACTORY RESET c ccccscceesceseseseecenesesesesneneneseeseneseseseens 51 Creating a rhythm set Patch mode 52 How to make the rhythm set Settings sasies pas eniris ener nennen nene 52 Editing the rhythm set parameters EE 52 Making settings that apply to the entire rhythm set Rhythm Common parameters 52 Editing the settings of each rhythm tone key Rhythm Tone parameters 52 Saving a rhythm set User Rhythm Det een 53 Convenient functi
159. eed SLOW of the low frequency rotor High Fast 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the fast speed FAST of the high frequency rotor Low Fast 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the fast speed FAST of the low frequency rotor 0 127 Adjusts the output level 09 COMPRESSOR The compressor flattens out high levels and boosts low levels smoothing out unevenness in volume L in Compressor L out PanL CT Pan R Rin gt R out Parameter Value Description Sustain 0 127 Adjusts the time over which low level sounds are boosted until they reach the specified volume Attack 0 127 Adjusts the attack time of an in put sound Pan L64 63R Adjusts the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Post Gain 0 6 12 18 Adjusts the output gain dB Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 71 Effects 10 LIMITER The limiter compresses signals that exceed a specified volume level preventing distortion from occurring L in L out LI PanL CT Pan R Rin R out Parameter Value Description Threshold 0 127 Adjusts the volume at which compression will begin Release 0 127 Adjusts the time from when the volume falls below the Thresh o
160. el the transmission press EXIT 6 After the transmission is finished the display will indicate COMPLETED 7 Stop the external sequencer Recording each part separately Next we will record the music data for each Part onto separate tracks We will start recording the song from the measure following the one in which the Performance settings were recorded We will record tracks in the order of drums bass gt accompaniment melody while listening to the tracks that were recorded on previous passes For example assign Tones to each Part as shown below Drums Part 10 Bass Part 9 Accompaniment Part 6 Melody Part 3 Tone changes and the actions of the Pitch Bend lever Modulation lever knobs and other controls are also recorded It is not necessary to record the song at the tempo at which it is to be played back You may record at a tempo that is comfortable for you Listening to the recorded performance When you finish recording all Parts play it back and listen to the result Note the following when playing back a song Tf you modify the settings of each Part volume panning etc you will need to re record the modified performance settings at the beginning of the song Set the Rx Sys Exc System Exclusive Receive Switch to ON p 90 When set to OFF the performance settings recorded at the beginning of the song cannot be received With the factory settings this will be ON 97
161. election of song is played back repeatedly 4 Press EXIT to stop playback To return the keyboard to performance mode press EXIT again or press DEMO again so the indicator goes out Unsaved settings changes may be lost when you start Demo Play Carry out the write procedure as required to save such data before listening to the demo songs p 48 p 53 p 59 All rights reserved Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws No data for the music that is played will be output from MIDI OUT Demo songs list The RS 50 comes with 3 demos T Roland Corporation Short sweet Roland Corporation Catch Me Roland Corporation 18 PATCH MODIFY yon While the demo songs are playing back playing the keyboard will not produce sound Quick Start Selecting a patch Try out the sounds On the RS 50 the sounds you use for normal playing are called patches A patch is analogous to an instrument held by a member of an orchestra Each patch consists of two tones an upper tone and lower tone You can assign the two tones to their own region of the keyboard p 44 and make independent settings for each tone p 46 ll Selecting a patch by category The RS 50 allows you to rapidly select and call up a patch by specifying the type of 20 patch AII the patches are organized into 10 category groups
162. equipped with MIDI connectors you can play multiple instruments with a single keyboard have multiple MIDI instruments perform in ensemble program the settings to change automatically to match the performance as the song progresses and more If you mainly use the RS 50 as a standalone keyboard instrument you may really not need to know much at all about MIDI However the following MIDI related information is provided so you can play the RS 50 using an external MIDI device or master other advanced techniques MIDI connectors The RS 50 has the following two types of MIDI connectors MIIDI OUT IN Sy BS e MIDI IN Connector Performance messages from an external MIDI device are received here When the RS 50 receives MIDI messages it will produce sound change the sound it s using or perform other operations e MIDI OUT Connector This connector transmits MIDI messages to external MIDI devices The RS 50 s MIDI OUT connector is used for sending the performance data of the keyboard controller section as well as the data used for saving various settings MIDI channels and multitimbral sound generators MIDI transmits many types of data over a single MIDI cable This is made possible by MIDI channels MIDI channels allow messages intended for a given instrument to be distinguished from messages intended for another instrument In some ways MIDI channels are similar to television channels By changing the channel on a TV recei
163. er you can call up settings from preset memory into the temporary area modify them and then store the modified data in rewritable memory 41 Overview Basic operation of the RS 50 Switching the mode The RS 50 has numerous functions and these functions are organized into the following two modes The operation of the sound generator and the screens that appear in the display will differ depending on the mode Patch mode You will use this mode when you want to play the keyboard in a band or a solo performance When you turn on the power the RS 50 will start up in Patch mode From other modes you can press PATCH to enter this mode All of the three built in effects processors are used only for the patch you are playing In Patch mode you can select and edit patches and create user patches Performance mode In this mode you can simultaneously play different sounds on sixteen parts After turning on the power press PERFORM to select this mode The three built in effects processors are used in common by the patches of each part You can create up to 8 user performances Editing parameters On the RS 50 the numerous parameters are organized into pages so that they can be displayed efficiently within the display To select a parameter move to the appropriate page The underlined area cursor in the screen will blink to indicate that you may edit that value
164. er Active Sensing messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF VALUE OFF ON Device ID Device ID Number When you want to transmit or receive System Exclusive messages set this parameter to match the Device ID number of the other MIDI device VALUE 17 32 Soft Thru Soft Through Switch The Thru function re transmits all messages received at the MIDI IN connector to the MIDI OUT connector without modifying them in any way VALUE OFF ON Making scale tune settings for a patch PATCH SCALE The Patch Scale function lets you use a variety of tunings for patches used in Patch mode US If you want to make scale tune settings for each part in Performance mode refer to Editing the scale tune settings SCALE TUNE p 58 Type Patch Scale Tune Type You can switch the Type parameter to recall various sample settings for Patch Scale When you change Type all patch scale tune parameters will be changed automatically VALUE EQUAL JUST maj in C JUST min in C ARABIC US For details on each type refer to Type Part Scale Tune Type p 58 Tune C Tune B Patch Scale Tune C B Make scale tune settings for Patch mode VALUE 64 63 91 Performing with an external MIDI device About MIDI MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface is a standard specification that allows music data to be exchanged among electronic musical instruments and computers By connecting MIDI devices that are
165. es resulting in a more mellow chorus sound Value 0 7 Level Chorus Level Sets the amount of the chorus sound Value 0 127 Feedback Chorus Feedback Level Sets the level at which the chorus sound is re input fed back into the chorus By using feedback a denser chorus sound can be created Higher values result in a greater feedback level Value 0 127 Delay Chorus Delay Time Sets the delay time of the chorus effect Value 0 127 Rate Chorus Rate Sets the speed frequency at which the chorus sound is modulated Higher values result in faster modulation Value 0 127 Adding effects Depth Chorus Depth Sets the depth at which the chorus sound is modulated Higher values result in deeper modulation Value 0 127 Send Lvl to Rev Chorus send level to reverb Sets the amount of chorus sound that will be sent to the reverb Higher values result in more sound being sent Value 0 127 Making reverb settings Regardless of the mode only one type of reverb can be used simultaneously There are eight types of reverb You can select any one of these After selecting the Type you can change the values for each of the parameters Type Reverb Type You can choose from 8 types of reverb Value ROOM1 3 Simulates the reverberation of room interiors It produces a well defined and spacious reverberation HALL1 2 Simulates the reverberation exhibited by halls They provide a deeper reverberation t
166. essed by a velocity value When you play a note strongly a high velocity value will be transmitted producing a louder volume or a different tone By editing the Velo Sens Depth and Velo Sens Ofs values you can adjust the relationship between your keyboard playing strength and the loudness of the notes that are produced Velo Sens Depth Velocity Sensitivity Depth Higher settings of this value allow you to produce notes in a wider range of loudness even with small changes in your playing strength Lower settings of this value will mean that even if you vary your playing strength significantly the notes that are sounded will not have a wide range of loudness VALUE 64 63 Velo Sens Ofs Velocity Sensitivity Offset With higher settings of this value loud sounds can be produced even when you play the keys softly With lower settings of this value the sounds will be soft even if you play strongly VALUE 64 63 Pitch Bend Range Specifies the amount of pitch change in semitone units maximum of two octaves that will occur when you operate the pitch bend lever The amount of change will be the same whether the lever is moved to left or right VALUE 0 24 e Adjusting the modulation of the sound LFO The LFO Low Frequency Oscillator applies cyclic change to the sound It can be applied to the pitch cutoff frequency or volume to produce vibrato wah or tremolo effects The original tones of the RS 50 contain LFO settings app
167. ewer voices Refer to Patch list p 111 and switch to patches that use tones with fewer voices Select patches whose KEY MODE is other than DUAL f the number of notes you are attempting to play simultaneously is significantly greater than the maximum polyphony reduce the number of note messages in the data n some cases you may be able to lighten the load of multiple notes by shortening the release of patches used in sections where the data is especially dense If you playback a song that contains an extremely large amount of data notes may be delayed or unsteady during playback This problem can also occur if the tempo is speeded up excessively Delete unneeded note data or knob data from the song Move notes that were input at the same location as chords so Appendix that they are staggered slightly Move data of parts other than the rhythm part slightly forward or backward Song data cannot be played back correctly Did you start playback at some point other than the beginning of the song Songs meant for playback with General MIDI System and General MIDI 2 System sound generators have a GM GM2 System On message recorded at the beginning of the song If this message is not received the song data may not play back correctly Are you playing back data whose format is something other than General MIDI 2 or General MIDI The sound generator of the RS 50 conforms to General MIDI 2 system It i
168. f the flanger effect Flg Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flg Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the flanger sound will be output Delay Time 0 500 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the delay sound is heard Dly Feedback 98 98 7o Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the delay input Negative settings will invert the phase Dly HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS Adjusts the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the delay feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Dly Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the flanger sound that is sent through the delay and the flanger sound that is not sent through the delay With a setting of D100 0W only the flanger sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the flanger sound that is sent through the delay will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level Adding effects 38 CHO gt FLANGER Chorus Flanger Thi
169. fects are set to ON 1 Press EFFECTS so it is lit The on off status of each effect multi effect chorus reverb will be displayed 2 Use PAGE CURSOR a to select the effect type and use VALUE to switch it on off When you play the keyboard in this state the effects whose master effect switch is turned on will be applied to each patch When the cursor is located at Rev and you want to edit the effect settings press PAGE CURSOR and the effect parameters selected previously will be displayed For further information refer to Making effects settings p 67 Effects 65 The effect signal path The following figure shows the path followed by the effects signals Performance Mode Patch Tone Tone MFX SW Part MFX 9 sw MFX Send A Level to Rev Tone Cho Part Cho Send Level Send Level y Cho Send Level to Rev MFX Send Level to Cho OUTPUT R L MONO Tone Rev Part Rev Send Level Send Level Performance Mode Rhythm Tone Part MFX 9 MFX Send MFX Send Level to Cho d d Level to Rev Tone Cho Part Cho Send Level Send Level y Cho Send Level to Rev OUTPUT R L MONO Tone Rev Part Rev Send Level Send Level Patch Mode Patch Tone MFX Send MFX Send Level to Cho d d Level to Rev Tone Cho Send Level O Cho Send Level to Rev
170. g equipment or NO e This unit either alone or in combination with an are amplifier and headphones or speakers may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiologist e Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are e Humid or are Exposed to rain or are Dusty or are e Subject to high levels of vibration e Donotallow any objects e g flammable material coins pins or liquids of any kind water soft S drinks etc to penetrate the unit Immediately turn the power off remove the AC adaptor from the outlet and request servicing by your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page when The AC adaptor or the power supply cord has been damaged or f smoke or unusual odor occurs Objects have fallen into or liquid has been spilled onto the unit or The unit has been exposed to rain or otherwise has become wet or The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance e In households with small children an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operati
171. g the program change receive switchen 95 Selecting RS 50 sounds from an external MIDI device sss 95 Using an external MIDI controller to change the RS 50 s one 96 Recording to an external sequencer EE 96 Connecting to an external sequencer EE 96 Making settings before recording EE 96 Recording iei teen e p a WR EE 97 Listening to the recorded performance EE 97 Playing together with the playback of a recorded performance sss 98 Transposing playback of performances Master Key Gutt eneen 98 Backing up saving all RS 50 settings on your external MIDI sequencer sess 98 Using the RS 50 as a General MIDI General MIDI 2 system compatible sound module 98 Playing back General MIDI General MIDI 2 music data 98 Performing with a computer eeeeeeee eren 99 Appendix EN La T TOUDIOSHOOUING tee 102 Error Messages MeSSages eee e ecce eee eeeeeeeeeeeeenn 105 Parameter e 106 Original tone lS sem 109 Pateh i M A 111 Rhythm Set Si aaa aa do de Ea eite si n rase CP Ru usi dde sa na a dx ERE UL ERMS 116 Performance liSt c concor eer eere rino u22ceccccabiaGcreniano a mee os Edge 120 R ythm guide Ez pn 120 Arpeggio template list
172. ge eee 93 Pitch Bend Lever us oda eko metet 29 Pitch Bend Range EE 47 PitchBend Dst Pitch Bend Destination 46 Play GM GM2 Music Data 98 Portament Sw Portamento Switch 47 Portamento An mee pee e RARE 47 Portamento Time esee 47 POWER c M iy 15 PresLBE iato RR e eerta 86 87 Program Charge retener Sevres aeoees 93 BEEN INIT serien eh 59 R heu satan San ere EE E 86 Receive Bank Sel Receive Bank Select Switch 57 Receive Ch Receive Channel A 57 Receive Prg Chg Receive Program Change Switch 57 Receive Sw Receive Switch esses 57 Release Time etie eite ener 28 Patch Tone Parameters A 48 RESONAN QGE 2 2 opi ete AEN 29 Resonance Patch Tone Parameters A 48 REVEL ist adonde leto e o eb tein 35 Reverb Character eese 87 Reverb Delay Feedback EE 87 Reverb Level engt eee eene rers 87 Reverb Parameters ve 87 Reverb pre low pass filter sssssssss 87 Reverb Send Lvl Reverb Send Level Patch Tone Parameters ee 46 Performance Part Effects EE 58 Rhythm Tone Parameters 53 Reverb Time eene perte rie tier 87 Reverb Type oeste eiie ensi 87 REY INITIATIZE ette tete retient 54 REY PRM CORY nnacetaneesueeteetu eue 53 REY REMOVE teen pet itl tei e ires 54 Rhythm Common Parameters 52 Rhythm Set eet eene emet
173. h the flanger will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 39 CHORUS DELAY This effect connects a chorus and a delay in parallel The parameters are the same as for 36 CHORUS gt DELAY However the Dly Balance parameter adjusts the volume balance between the direct sound and the delay sound Balance D Balance D 40 FLG DELAY Flanger Delay This effect connects a flanger and a delay in parallel The parameters are the same as for 37 FLG gt DELAY However the Dly Balance parameter adjusts the volume balance between the direct sound and the delay sound 41 CHO FLANGER Chorus Flanger This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in parallel The parameters are the same as for 38 CHO gt FLANGER However the Flanger Balance parameter adjusts the volume balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound Balance D Balance D 42 LOFI This effect intentionally degrades the audio quality to simulate a Lo Fi sound It is particularly effective on drums Lin 2 Band EQ L out Parameter Value Description Bit Down 0 11 This setting lowers the audio quality Theaudio quality will worsen as this setting is increased This coarsens the output signal The sound will become coarser as this setting is increased S RateDown 0 7 Post Gain 0 6 412 18 Adjusts the output signal dB Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of
174. han the Room reverbs PLATE Simulates a plate reverb unit a type of artificial reverb that utilized a metal plate DELAY A standard delay that produces echo effects PANNING DELAY This is a special delay in which the delayed sound alternates between left and right It is effective when you are listening in stereo MEM Reverb Type provides several preset like example settings of the reverb parameters When you switch types the other reverb parameters will change according to the settings of the type you select If you intend to edit the other parameters select a type first and then edit the other parameters Character Reverb Character Selects the type of reverb 0 5 are reverb effects and 6 and 7 are delay effects Value 0 7 Pre LPF Reverb pre low pass filter A low pass filter can be applied to the sound coming into the reverb to cut the high frequency range Higher values will cut more of the high frequencies resulting in a more mellow reverberation Value 0 7 Level Reverb Level Sets the amount of the reverberant sound Higher values result in louder reverberation Value 0 127 Time Reverb Time Sets the time over which the reverberation will continue Higher values result in longer reverberation Value 0 127 Delay Feedback Reverb Delay Feedback This parameter is available when the Reverb Character Character is set to 6 7 or the Reverb Type Type is set to Delay or Panning Delay It
175. he MIDI cable as shown in the figure below 4 As described in Turning on the power p 15 turn on the power of each device Performing with an external MIDI device Setting the patch receive channel When you have finished connecting the external MIDI device match RS 50 s Receive channel with the external MIDI device s Transmit channel Here we will explain the settings for using the RS 50 in Patch mode If you are using the RS 50 in Performance mode the part and channel numbers will be the same unless you change the settings 1 Press SYSTEM so it is lit 2 Use PAGE CURSOR a to select Patch Rx Ch patch receive channel MEMD By holding down SHIFT and using PAGE CURSOR a gt you can quickly select the SYSTEM MIDI group p 90 3 Use VALUE to modify the value VALUE 1 16 Performance data of each part will be received on the selected channel Setting the program change receive switch Then to enable tones to be switched from the external MIDI device set the Receive Switch for Program Change and Bank Select to ON Factory settings have these set to ON 1 Press SYSTEM so it is lit 2 Use PAGE CURSOR a to select Rx Prog Chg Receive Program Change Switch and Rx Bank Sel Receive Bank Select Switch 3 Use VALUE to set both parameters to ON 4 Press WRITE to save the settings For further informatio
176. he percussive sound VALUE 0 127 Pan Sets the pan position stereo location of each percussive sound when stereo output is used With an increase in the value for L more of the sound will be heard as coming from the left side Similarly more of the sound will originate at the right if the value of R is increased When set to RND RANDOM you obtain a specialized effect whereby the sound randomly moves left and right with each press of a key VALUE RND L63 0 63R Creating a rhythm set Patch mode Specifying the amount of signal sent to the effect Chorus Send Lvl Chorus Send Level Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus for each tone VALUE 0 127 Reverb Send Lvl Reverb Send Level Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb for each tone VALUE 0 127 Saving a rhythm set User Rhythm Set Once you have edited a rhythm set to your liking use the following procedure to save it 1 Press PATCH so it is lit and you are in Patch mode 2 Select the rhythm set that you want to edit 3 Edit the rhythm set and its rhythm tones Making settings that apply to the entire rhythm set Rhythm Common parameters p 52 Editing the settings of each rhythm tone key Rhythm Tone parameters p 52 MEMO The patch modify settings p 26 are not saved for rhythm sets 4 When the rhythm set is to your liking press WRITE Use VALUE to specify the number in which the rhythm set is to b
177. he scale tune for Patch mode refer to Making scale tune settings for a patch PATCH SCALE p 91 i Q t 57 Playing more than one sound simultaneously Performance mode Editing the scale tune settings SCALE TUNE The Scale Tune function lets you use a variety of tunings For each note C B you can specify the pitch in units of one cent 1 100th of a semitone Scale Tune settings are made independently for each part US If you want to edit the scale tune for Patch mode refer to Making scale tune settings for a patch PATCH SCALE p 91 1 Select the part setup parameter Scale Tune p 57 2 Press ENTER 3 Use PAGE CURSOR a to select Type or Tune and use VALUE to specify its value 4 Press EXIT to return to the above screen Type Part Scale Tune Type You can switch the Type parameter to recall various sample settings for Scale Tune When you change Type all scale tune parameters will be changed automatically EQUAL Equal Temperament This tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts and is the most widely used method of temperament used in Western music JUST maj in C Just Temperament major Compared with equal temperament the princ
178. hord2 KE 64 50 2 SINGLE 009 Pf09 EL Grand PNO 64 9 2 SINGLE 069 Ky09 Synth Harpsi KE 64 51 2 SINGLE 010 Pf10 Honky tonk 3 PNO 64 0 2 SINGLE 070 Ky10 Pretty Bell BEL 64 52 _ 2 SINGLE 011 Pf11 LA Piano PNO 64 1 4 SINGLE 071 Ky11 Hyper Bell BEL 64 53 2 SINGLE 012 Pf12 RS Grand ABs PNO 64 2 2 SPLIT 072 Ky12 Warm Bell BEL 64 54 2 SINGLE 013 Pf13 RS Grand amp Pad PNO 64 3 4 DUAL 073 Ky13 RS Crystal BE 64 55 4 SINGLE 014 Pf14 RSGrand amp Vox PNO 64 4 4 DUAL 074 Ky14 SouthernWind BEL 64 56 4 SINGLE 015 Pf15 AEx PianoVox PNO 64 5 6 DUAL 075 Ky15 Singing Bell BEL 64 57 2 SINGLE 016 Pfl6 Stage Rhodes EP 64 6 2 SINGLE 076 Ky16 MOD Bell BEL 64 58 2 SINGLE 017 Pf17 StageRhodes2 EP 64 7 2 SINGLE 077 Ky17 MOD 5th Bell BEL 64 59 4 DUAL 018 Pf18 StageRhodes3 EP 64 8 2 SINGLE 078 Ky18 Mysterious BE 64 60 4 SINGLE 019 Pf19 Sweet Stage EP 64 9 2 SINGLE 079 Ky19 RS Digi Bell BEL 64 61 2 SINGLE 020 Pf20 70 s Ballad EP 64 20 2 SINGLE 080 Ky20 RS Bell Str BEL 64 62 5 DUAL 021 Pf21 Dyno Rhodes EP 64 21 2 SINGLE 081 Ky21 AEx SynBells BEL 64 63 8 DUAL 022 Pf22 RS Rhodes 1 EP 64 22 1 SINGLE 082 Ky22 RS Marimba MLT 64 64 1 SINGLE 023 Pf23 Pur
179. ing System Reset xO Di li d 120 126 127 123 127 XOXXXx XOOXOO 1 OX is selectable 2 Recognized as M 1 even if Mai 8 Recognized when the Clock Source parameter SYSTEM is set to MIDI Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No A separate publication titled MIDI Implementation is also available It provides complete details concerning the way MIDI has been implemented on this unit If you should require this publication such as when you intend to carry out byte level programming please contact the nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor 124 Specifications RS 50 Synthesizer Keyboard conforms to General MIDI 2 System Keyboard 61 keys with velocity Sound Generator Maximum Polyphony 64 voices Parts 16 Two Tones can be assigned to each part Patch and can be split or layered Wave Memory 32 M bytes 16 bit linear equivalent Preset Memory Original Tones 640 Patches 640 RS 50 original 384 General MIDI 2 256 Rhythm Sets 20 RS 50 original 11 General MIDI 2 9 Performances 32 User Memory Patches 128 Two Tones can be assigned to each Patch Rhythm Sets 2 Performances 8 Effects Multi Effects 47 types Reverb 8 types Chorus 8 types Rhythm Guide Preset Patterns 32 Tempo 5 300 BPM with tap tempo function Multi Chord Memory Preset Chord
180. iple triads sound pure in this tuning However this effect is achieved only in one key and chords will become ambiguous if you transpose JUST min in C Just Temperament minor Compared with equal temperament the principle triads sound pure in this tuning However this effect is achieved only in one key and chords will become ambiguous if you transpose ARABIC Arabian Scale In this scale E and B are a quarter note lower and CH F and G are a quarter note higher compared to equal temperament The intervals between G and B C and E F and G Bb and C and Eb and F have a natural third the interval between a major third and a minor third Tune C B Part Scale Tune C B Make scale tune settings for each part Value 64 63 Editing the effect settings for each part of the performance Performance Part Effect 1 Press PERFORM so it is lit and you are in Performance mode 2 Select a performance 3 Press PART SELECT so it is lit 4 Use 0 9 to select the part whose settings you want to edit To select the parts 11 16 hold down SHIFT and press 1 6 p 43 5 Press EFFECTS so it is lit Now you can make settings for the performance part effect parameters 6 Use PAGE CURSOR lt gt to select a parameter and use VALUE to specify the value You can modify the following parameters US To save the edited performance refer to Saving a performance p 59 Master Effec
181. it and you are in Performance mode Select the copy destination performance 2 Press UTILITY 3 Use PAGE CURSOR a p to select 1 PERFORM PRM COPY 4 Press ENTER 5 Use VALUE to select MFX CHORUS or REVERB 6 Press PAGE CURSOR Use VALUE to specify whether you will copy PATCH effect settings or PERFORM performance effect settings 7 Press PAGE CURSOR p J When copying PATCH effect settings Use VALUE to select the patch whose effect settings you want to copy When copying PERFORM Performance effect settings Use VALUE to select the performance whose effect settings you want to copy 8 Press ENTER The effect settings will be copied to the currently selected performance When the display indicates COMPLETED the copy operation has been completed MEMD If you copy multi effect settings those settings will be pasted into the effect parameters of the performance regardless of the MEX Source setting p 56 This means that if the MFX Source is set to PART for either or both the copy source and copy destination you may not be able to tell that the copy made any difference If the MFX Source of the current performance is set to PART change it to PERFORM Additionally if MFX Source of the copy source is set to PART you will need to select
182. ixed velocity regardless of how strongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to the desired value 1 127 Value REAL 1 127 Octave Range Arpeggio Octave Range Sets the key range in octaves over which arpeggio will take place If you want the arpeggio to sound using only the notes that you actually play set this parameter to 0 To have the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave higher set this parameter to 1 A setting of 1 will make the arpeggio sound 2 D D bp Ei g c Eu bg 7 S g D using the notes you play and notes 1 octave lower Value 8 43 Key Trigger Arpeggio Key Trigger Turn this ON if you want the arpeggio to start at the moment that you press the key If you want the arpeggio to start playing in synchronization with Rhythm guide or the external sequencer turn this OFF Value OFF ON 63 Using chord memory function Playing a chord at the touch of a finger Multi chord Memory p 24 1 Press CHORD MEMORY so it is lit 2 Select the desired chord set When you play the keyboard a chord of the specified structure will sound according to the key you press Select the desired chord set p 25 3 To stop the performance using the chord memory press CHORD MEMORY so it goes out Creating an original chord set User Chord Set 1 Press CHORD MEMORY so it is lit 2 Press PARAM so it is lit 3
183. justing the sensitivity of the D Beam controllers D BEAM SENS The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change depending on the amount of light in the vicinity of the unit If it does not function as you expect adjust the sensitivity as appropriate for the brightness of your location Increasing this value will raise the sensitivity l Press SOLO SYNTH ACTIVE EXPRESS or ASSIGNABLE so it is lit 2 Press PARAM 3 Use PAGE CURSOR 4 to select Sens 4 Use VALUE to adjust the sensitivity Value 1 10 As you increase this value the D Beam controller will become more sensitive Normally you will leave it at a setting of 5 5 Press EXIT or PARAM to return to the previous screen E Changing the polarity of the change D BEAM POLARITY By changing the D Beam Polarity setting you can invert the direction of the effect that is applied l Press SOLO SYNTH ACTIVE EXPRESS or ASSIGNABLE so it is lit 2 Press PARAM 3 Use PAGE CURSOR to select Polarity 4 Use VALUE to change the polarity Value NORMAL REVERSE 5 Press EXIT or PARAM to return to the previous screen 34 NEM This setting remains stored in memory even while the power is off EMD This setting remains stored in memory even while the power is off Applying various effects to the sound Using the RS 50 effects Three separate effect
184. knob of the panel p 28 VALUE 64 63 Saving a patch When you have edited a patch to your liking use the following procedure to save it 1 Press PATCH so it is lit and you are in Patch mode 2 Select the patch that you want to edit 3 Edit the patch VS Changing the tone with the knobs Patch Modify p 26 How to make the patch settings p 44 4 When the sound is to your liking press WRITE Use VALUE to specify the number in which the user patch is to be saved U001 U128 As shown above the display will show only the user patch number if nothing has yet been saved to that number von If you save to a number in which a user patch has already been saved be aware that the previously saved settings will be overwritten and lost 5 Press ENTER 6 Use VALUE to specify the category for the user patch you want to save US For more about the category refer to Patch categories p 49 7 Press ENTER once again to execute When the user patch has been saved the display will indicate COMPLETED This completes the procedure MEM If you decide not to save the user patch press EXIT If you do not change Name Patch Name p 45 the patch will have the same name as the one you selected in step 2 Creating a patch Patch mode Patch categories On the RS 50 a patch you edit can be named and saved in the desired category of
185. l Tom 2 1 Room Tom 1 1 Rock Tom 2 1 Synth Drum 2 E House Kick 2 Standard OHH EXC1 1 Standard OHH EXC1 1 Standard OHH EXC1 1 Standard OHH EXC1 1 PlasticKick1 2 Real Tom 2 1 Room Tom 1 1 Rock Tom 2 1 Synth Drum 2 C348 PlasticKick2 1 Real Tom 1 1 Room Tom 1 1 Rock Tom 1 1 Synth Drum 2 E ns Esn 2 Crash Cym 1 1 Crash Cym 1 1 Crash Cym 1 1 Crash Cym 1 1 50 RS Snr 2 2 RealTom 1 1 Room Tom 1 1 Rock Tom 1 1 Synth Drum 2 EB ORS sns 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 52 RS Snr 4 2 ChinaCymbal 1 ChinaCymbal1 1 ChinaCymbal1 1 Rev Cymbl 1 1 53 Standard Snr 1 Ride Bell 2 1 Ride Bell 2 1 Ride Bell 2 1 Ride Bell 2 1 E Rock Snr 4 Tambourine 3 1 Tambourine 3 1 Tambourine 3 1 Tambourine 3 1 55 RS Jazz Snr 1 Splash Cym 1 Splash Cym 1 Splash Cym 1 Splash Cym 1 EN Jazz Snr 1 Cowbell 1 Cowbell 1 Cowbell 1 Cowbell 1 57 Brush Slap 1 1 Crash Cym 2 1 Crash Cym 2 1 Crash Cym 2 1 Crash Cym 2 1 ES Brush Slap 2 3 Vibraslap 1 Vibraslap 1 Vibraslap 1 Vibraslap 1 59 BrushSwirl 1 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 C4 60 BrushSwirl 2 2 Bongo High 1 1 Bongo High 1 1 Bongo High 1 1 Bongo High 1 1 DR pap Snr 1 2 Bongo Low 1 1 Bongo Low 1 1 Bongo Low 1 1 Bongo Low 1 1 62 R amp B Snr 2 2 Conga Hi Mt 1 Conga Hi Mt 1 Conga Hi Mt 1 Conga Hi Mt 1 E Dry Snr 1 1 CongaHi Open 1 CongaHi Open 1 CongaHi Open 1 CongaHi Open 1 64 Dry Snr 2 1 CongaLowOpen 1 CongaLowOpen 1 CongaLowOpen 1 Conga
186. lar bel 1 E Rs Snr 3 2 RSSnr1 2 Brush Slap 1 1 RS Jazz Snr 1 Tubular bel 1 33 RS Kick 3 2 RS Kick2 2 Jazz Kick 2 2 Jazz Kick 2 2 Tubular be 1 CEO Rs PHH EXC1 1 RSPHH EXC1 1 Jazz PHH EXC1 1 Brush PHH EXC1 1 Tubular be 1 go RS Kick 1 2 Power Kick 1 Jazz Kick 3 2 Jazz Kick 1 1 Tubular be 1 C236 RS Kick 2 2 Hard Kick 3 JazzDryKick2 2 Jazz Kick 3 2 Concert BD 1 Kul RS Stick 2 RS Stick 2 Dry Stick 1 1 Brush Slap 2 3 Side Stick 1 38 RS Snr 1 2 RSSnr1 2 Jazz Rim 1 BrushSwirl 2 2 Concert Snr 1 EE Ghostarim 2 Ghost amp Fim 2 SnareGhost 1 Brush Slap 1 1 TR909 Clap 1 1 ao RS Snr 2 2 Rock Snr 4 RS Jazz Snr 1 BrushSwirl 1 1 Concert Snr 1 RS Tom L 1 RS Tom L 1 JazzTom L 1 Brush Tom L 3 Timpani 1 LEA RS CHH3 EXC1 1 RSCHH 1 EXC1 1 RSCHH1 EXC1 1 Brush CHH EXC1 1 Timpani 1 43 RS Tom L Flm 1 RS Tom L 1 JazzTomL Flm 1 Brush Tom L 3 Timpani 1 E RS CHH 4 EXC1 1 RSCHH2 EXC1 1 RSCHH2 EXC1 1 Brush PHH EXC1 1 Timpani 1 45 RS Tom M 1 RS TonM 1 JazzTom M 1 Brush Tom M 3 Timpani 1 EJ Rs OHH 2 EXC1 1 RSOHH1 EXC1 1 RSOHH1 EXC1 1 Brush OHH EXC1 1 Timpani 1 ud RS Tom M Fim 1 RS Tom M 1 JazzTomM FIm 1 Brush Tom M 3 Timpani 1 C348 RS Tom H 1 RS Tom H 1 JazzTom H 1 Brush Tom H 3 Timpani 1 ER Crash Cym 3 2 Crash Cym 3 2 Jazz Crash 2 Brush Crash 1 Timpani 1 50 RS Tom H Flm 1 RS Tom H 1 JazzTomH Flm 1 Brush Tom H 3 Timpani 1 CERN Rock Ride 1 1 Rock Ride 3 1 Jazz Ride 1
187. lay input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the delay feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Dly Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the enhancer sound that issent through the delay and the enhancer sound that is not sent through the delay With a setting of D100 0W only the enhancer sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the enhancer sound that is sent through the delay will be output Level 0 12 Adjusts the output level 81 Effects 36 CHORUS DELAY This effect connects a chorus and a delay unit in series L in Balance D Balance D O Balance D LI Balance W Pl Delay H y Balance W Feedback O R out L out Balance D Parameter Value Description Cho Delay 0 0 100 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard Cho Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the modulation speed of the chorus effect Cho Depth 0 127 Adjusts the modulation depth of the chorus effect Cho Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Delay Time 0 500 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the dir
188. ld Level until compression is no longer applied Ratio 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 Adjusts the compression ratio 100 1 Pan L64 63R Adjusts the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Post Gain 0 6 12 18 Adjusts the output gain dB Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 11 HEXA CHORUS Hexa chorus uses a six phase chorus six layers of chorused sound to give richness and spatial spread to the sound L in Rin Balance D J Balance W CO Hexa Chorus usuris O Balance D L out Balance W R out Parameter Value Description Pre Delay 0 0 100 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the rate of modulation Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of modula tion Pre Delay Dev 0 20 Pre Delay Deviation adjusts the differences in Pre Delay be tween each chorus sound Pre Delay determines the time from when the direct sound be gins until the processed sound is heard Depth Dev 20 20 Adjusts the difference in modu lation depth between each cho rus sound Parameter Value Description Pan Dev 0 20 Adjusts the difference in stereo
189. leration 0 15 This parameter adjusts the time over which the Delay Time will change from the current setting to a newly specified setting The rate of change for the Delay Time directly affects the rate of pitch change HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feed back set this parameter to BY PASS L64 63R Adjusts the stereo location of the delay sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Value D100 0W D0 100W Parameter Balance Description Adjusts the volume balance be tween the direct sound and the delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the delay sound will be output Adjusts the output level Level 0 127 23 2V PCH SHIFT 2 Voice Pitch Shifter A Pitch Shifter shifts the pitch of the direct sound This 2 voice pitch shifter has two pitch shifters and can add two pitch shifted sounds to the direct sound Balance D Lin Level Balance A Balance D Value 1 2 3 4 5 Parameter Mode Description Higher settings of this parame ter will result in slower re sponse
190. ll units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices Placement Using the unit near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it farther away from the source of inter ference This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices such as cell phones are operated in the vicinity of this unit Such noise could occur when receiving or initi ating a call or while conversing Should you experience such problems you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit or switch them off Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit When moved from one location to another where the temperature and or humidity is very different water droplets condensation may form inside the unit Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition Therefore before using the unit you must allow it to stand for several hours until the condensation has completely evaporated Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard
191. lower and milder Turn the LFO RATE knob Turning this to the right clockwise increases the speed of the undulating sound while turning it to the left counterclockwise slows the undulation down 27 Applying various effects to the sound E Changing the sound s volume ENVELOPE MEMO The volume continues to change from the time a key is pressed to when it is released The envelope is the curve A Attack Time The time from when the keyboard is pressed until the maximum that shows how the volume tonal change is reached of an instrument changes D Delay Time The time from when the maximum tonal change is reached until the from the beginning of a Sustain Level is reached note to its end Each S Sustain level Volume that is sustained while you hold down the key PERC aa ea GRE haa R Release Time The time from when the keyboard is released until the sound distinctive type of disappears envelope but this can change depending on how Use the ENVELOPE 3 knobs to change the A D and R times the instrument is played Each tone has its own Sustain level which cannot be modified and is an important factor in the character of the A Attack time sound For example when D Decay time a trumpet is blown strongly volume R Release time Sound ends it produces a piercing sound with a rapid attack Sustain but when blown softly it Level produces a gentler and E E E E more muted attack AA D A Tim
192. m set 2 Press UTILITY 3 Use PAGE CURSOR a p to select 1 RHY PRM COPY 4 Press ENTER 5 Use VALUE to select MFX CHORUS or REVERB 6 Press PAGE CURSOR Use VALUE to specify whether you will copy RHYTHM effect settings or PERFORM Performance effect settings E Ss gt a o o s L s g s ao 7 Press PAGE CURSOR Copying RHYTHM effect settings Select the copy source rhythm set Copying PERFORM Performance effect settings Select the copy source performance 8 Press ENTER The effect settings will be copied to the currently selected rhythm set When the data has been copied the display will indicate COMPLETED This ends the procedure 53 Creating a rhythm set Patch mode Initializing the settings of a specific rhythm tone RHY INITIALIZE This operation initializes the rhythm tone parameters p 52 to the state of the preset rhythm tone before its parameters were edited MEM If you want to return all parameters of the selected rhythm set to the preset state simply re select the preset rhythm set from which you started editing von The Initialize operation applies only to the currently selected tone it will not change the content of other sounds stored in user memory If you want to restore all settings to the factory set condition execute the F
193. n refer to How to make the system function settings p 88 Press EXIT to cancel the operation and return to the previous page For instructions on setting the external MIDI device s Transmit channel refer to the owner s manual for that device Ifyou are using Performance mode you will also need to set Receive Sw Receive Prg Chg and Receive Bank Sel for each part in addition to the settings described above p 57 Selecting RS 50 sounds from an external MIDI device Transmitting Bank Select Controller Numbers 0 amp 32 and Program Change messages from the external MIDI device to the RS 50 allows you to switch patches and rhythm sets 1 Transmit a value for the Bank Select MSB controller number 0 BnH 00H mmH message to the RS 50 2 Transmit a value for the Bank Select LSB controller number 32 BnH 20H IIH message to the RS 50 3 Transmit a Program Change CnH ppH to the RS 50 n MIDI channel number mm ll Bank number pp Program number MEM The Perform Ctrl Ch Performance Control Channel setting lets you switch performances in Performance mode With the factory settings this is set to OFF performances will not be switched Bank number program number correspondence table The MIDI messages transmitted by an external MIDI device correspond with patches rhythm sets on the RS 50 as shown in the following table If the Program numbers on your external MIDI device are
194. ng HLD 68 38 0 85 2 SINGLE 440 Vo57 Itopia VOX 68 49 92 2 SINGLE 507 Sy58 Wire Lead HLD 68 39 1 85 2 SINGLE 441 Vo58 Bowed Glass SPD 68 50 0 93 9 SINGLE 508 Sy59 Solo Vox SLD 68 40 0 86 2 SINGLE 442 Vo59 Metal Pad BPD 68 51 0 94 3 SINGLE 509 Sy60 5th Saw Wave HLD 68 41 0 87 2 SINGLE 443 Vo60 Halo Pad BPD 68 52 0 95 2 SINGLE 510 Sy61 Bass amp Lead HLD 68 42 0 88 2 SINGLE 444 Vo61 Sweep Pad SPD 68 53 0 96 1 SINGLE 511 Sy62 Delayed Lead HLD 68 43 1 88 2 SINGLE 445 Vo62 Soundtrack SPD 68 55 0 98 2 SINGLE 512 Sy63 Fantasia SYN 68 44 0 89 2 SINGLE 446 Vo63 Echo Drops BPD 68 61 0 103 1 SINGLE 513 Sy64 Polysynth SYN 68 47 0 91 2 SINGLE 447 Vo64 Echo Bell BPD 68 62 1 103 2 SINGLE 514 Sy65 Ice Rain SYN 68 54 0 97 2 SINGLE 448 Vo65 Echo Pan BPD 68 63 2 103 2 SINGLE 515 Sy66 Brightness SYN 68 59 0 101 2 SINGLE 449 Vo66 Star Theme BPD 68 64 0 104 2 SINGLE 516 Sy67 Goblin PLS 68 60 0 102 2 SINGLE 517 Sy68 Breath Noise FX 68 91 0 122 1 SINGLE 8 SYNTH 518 Sy69 Fl Key Click FX 68 92 1 122 1 SINGLE No NAME Cate Patch Select GM2 Patch Select Voice Key gory MSB 87 MSB 121 Mode LSB PC LSB PC 450 Sy01 RSSawLead 1 HLD 66 25 2 SINGLE 451 Sy02 RS SawLead 2 HLD 66 26 4 DUAL 452 Sy03 RSSawLead 3 HLD 66 27 2 SINGLE 453 Sy04 MG Lead 1 HLD 66 28 SINGLE 454 Sy05 MG Lead 2 HLD 66 29 SINGLE 455 Sy06 MG Lead 3 HLD 66 30 SINGLE 45
195. nspose buttons OCT These buttons adjust the pitch of the keyboard in octave steps maximum 3 octaves p 30 TRANSPOSE Pressing either of these buttons while holding down SHIFT allows you to transpose the keyboard in semitone steps 5 6 p 31 PHRASE ARPEGGIO button Switches phrase arpeggio function on off To make settings for the phrase arpeggio make this button light and then press PARAM p 23 CHORD MEMORY button Switches chord memory function on off To make settings for the chord memory function get this button to light and then press PARAM p 24 D DISPLAY This displays information regarding the operation you are performing RHYTHM GUIDE button Switches Rhythm guide function on off p 36 F NUMERIC button When this button is lit the direct access buttons will function as a numeric keypad This lets you directly input or specify a numerical value for the displayed item patch number or parameter 0 9 DIRECT ACCESS buttons In Patch mode use these buttons to switch between the sound categories printed on the panel p 20 In Performance mode use these buttons to directly select a performance by specifying the lowest digit of the performance number p 55 However if the NUMERIC or PART SELECT buttons are lit the 0 9 buttons will change to the corresponding function G VALUE buttons Use these buttons to switch the number of an item
196. o each character in the name and when the cursor is located at the last character pressing PAGE CURSOR again will take you to the next page The same applies when moving in the opposite direction In pages where you can assign a name you can hold down SHIFT and use PAGE CURSOR lt to jump to the previous or next page Use VALUE to modify the characters Press gt The cursor moves to the next digit Use VALUE to modify the characters Press gt The cursor moves to the last digit zi Use VALUE to modify the characters Press gt Moves to the next page By pressing VALUE you can change the character at the cursor position Value space A Z a z 0 9 1 amp lt gt e Y 1 When inputting characters you can perform the following operations conveniently by pressing 0 9 0 Deletes all the characters 1 Displays a at the cursor position 2 Displays a space at the cursor position 3 Displays an A at the cursor position 4 Displays an a at the cursor position 5 Displays a 0 at the cursor position 6 Converts capital and lowercase characters 7 Inserts a space at the cursor position 8 Deletes a character at the cursor position and moves the following characters to the left 9 no assignment When one page cont
197. o the effect parameters of the performance itself PART1 PART16 The MFX effect will be applied according to the parameters of the patch that is selected for the part Editing the effect settings of a performance In Performance mode you can press EFFECTS to edit the effect settings of a performance For details refer to Adding effects p 65 US To save the edited performance refer to Saving a performance p 59 Editing the part settings of a performance Part Setup 1 Press PERFORM so it is lit and you are in Performance mode 2 Select a performance 3 Press PART SELECT so it is lit 4 Press PARAM so it is lit 5 Use 0 9 to select the part whose settings you want to edit To select the parts 11 16 hold down SHIFT and press 1 6 p 43 Now you can edit the Part Setup parameters 6 Use PAGE CURSOR lt to select a parameter and use VALUE to specify its value You can modify the following parameters US To save the edited performance refer to Saving a performance p 59 Part parameters of a performance Part Setup Parameters Level Part Level Sets the volume of each part This is mainly used to achieve the volume balance between Parts Value 0 127 Pan Part Pan When stereo output is used this setting sets the pan position stereo location of each Part With an increase in the value for L more of the sound will be heard as coming from the left
198. o the delayed sound producing an effect similar to a flanger When Feedback Mode is NORMAL Feedback Feedback L in Feedback Feedback Parameter Value Description Feedback Mode NORMAL CROSS Selects the way in which delay sound is fed back into the effect NORMAL The left delay sound will be fed back into the left de lay and the right delay sound into the right delay CROSS The left delay sound will be fed back into the right de lay and the right delay sound into the left delay Delay Left 0 370 ms Adjusts the time from the direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay Right 0 370 ms Adjusts the time from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard Feedback 98 98 7o Adjusts the proportion 6 of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feed back set this parameter to BY PASS Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the speed of the modu lation Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of the modu lation Phase 0 180 deg Adjusts the spatial spread of the sound 75 Effects Parameter Value Description Low Gain 15 15 dB
199. ocal Roland Service Station fany sort of message is being displayed on the screen during an operation refer to Error Messages Messages p 105 No power Is the AC Adapter plugged into the power socket correctly No sound Is the power for the connected amp and speakers turned on p 15 Is the volume turned down Check the volume settings for the RS 50 and any connected amp or mixer p 15 Are the components properly connected p 14 If you are able to hear sound through headphones this may suggest a short in a cable or a malfunctioning amp or mixer Recheck connector cables and the connected equipment If you are in Performance mode have the Part Level settings been lowered p 56 Have you switched the RS 50 mode to that for listening to demo songs Press EXIT to return to regular performance mode p 18 Is SOLO SYNTH set to ON The RS 50 does not sound if you just switch SOLO SYNTH on Hold down keys then move your hand over the D Beam p 32 Are the effects settings correct Check effects ON OFF p 65 multi effects levels p 46 p 56 and other related settings Has the pitch of the patch exceeded the range in which it can be sounded normally Use Octave Shift to lower raise the range being played p 30 If no sound is produced when you press keys on the keyboard is Local control set to OFF Set Local Control to ON p 89 Do the transmission and recep
200. of the currently selected patch 8 Press ENTER The upper tone or lower tone settings will be copied to the currently selected patch When the data has been copied the display will indicate COMPLETED This ends the procedure 49 Creating a patch Patch mode Copying MFX CHORUS or REVERB effect settings 1 Press PATCH so it is lit and you are in Patch mode Select the copy destination patch 2 Press UTILITY 3 Use PAGE CURSOR a H to select 1 PATCH PRM COPY 4 Press ENTER 5 Use VALUE to select MFX CHORUS or REVERB 6 Press PAGE CURSOR Use VALUE to specify whether you will copy PATCH effect settings or PERFORM Performance effect settings 7 Press PAGE CURSOR Copying PATCH effect settings Use VALUE to select the copy source patch Copying PERFORM Performance effect settings Use VALUE to select the copy source performance 8 Press ENTER The effect settings will be copied to the currently selected patch When the data has been copied the display will indicate COMPLETED This ends the procedure Initializing the parameters of a patch PATCH INITIALIZE This operation initializes the currently selected patch settings Since all patch parameters will be initialized this is convenient when you want to create a sound from scratch
201. on of the unit Protect the unit from strong impact Do not drop it an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be especially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through e Do not force the unit s power supply cord to share S Before using the unit in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page e DO NOT play a CD ROM disc on a conventional audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a S level that could cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result N CAUTION their location or position does not interfere with their proper ventilation e The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so e Always grasp only the output plug or the body of the AC adaptor when plugging into or Q unplugging from this unit or an outlet adaptor and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other accumulations away from its prongs Also disconnect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the powe
202. ons AR penas EN a a a mi M Jj PART Track cHoRD NF system d Mure warre VE mm SHIFT Gr EZ GUITAR RCH WORLD BRASS VOCAL SYNTH BASS pi Ei PAD 5 3 Use VALUE to select a Chord Set The user chord set appears after the preset chord sets 4 When you press EXIT the Multi chord Memory function will remain on and you will return to the previous screen QUICK SEG ERASE D UNDO PATCH MODIFY e UPPER e LOWER DESTINATION TONE on ATTACK DECAY RELEASE BALANCE BALANCE RATE LFO DEPTH CI mmc n m Qs Qs QV ue ZA MODE posincie FO SER AN OO 9 DUAL QI QI If you want to select a chord set once again press CHORD MEMORY so it goes out and then press CHORD MEMORY once again so it is lit The selected chord set remains stored in memory even while the power is off 5 To turn off the Multi chord Memory function press CHORD MEMORY again so the indicator goes out You can create your own chord set by saving chords you have created Multi chord set list p 122 For further information refer to Creating an original chord set User Chord Set p 64 25 Applying various effects to the sound Changing the tone with the knobs Patch Modify Using the five panel knobs you can change the tone in real time MEMD On the RS 50 each patch consists of
203. ons for rhythm set editing Rhythm Set Utility e 53 Copying effect settings from a rhythm set RHY PRM COPY 53 Initializing the settings of a specific rhythm tone RHY INITIALIZE eeeee 54 Erasing a rhythm set you saved RHY REMOVE 54 Playing more than one sound simultaneously Performance mode 55 Choosing a part and selecting the sound nennen 55 Selecting performance pumberg E tenente entente nene 55 Editing the settings of a Performancen 55 Making settings that apply to the entire performance sssssssssseseeeeene 55 Editing the effect settings of a performance En 56 Editing the part settings of a performance Part Setup 56 Editing the effect settings for each part of the performance Performance Part Effect 58 SAVING a performarice E 59 Convenient functions for performance editing Performance Utility sss 59 Copying part or effect parameters PERFORM PRM COPY 59 Initializing the parameters of a performance PERFORM INIT 60 Transmitting performance settings from the MIDI OUT connector XFER to MIDI 61 Restoring the factory settings FACTORY RESET ssssssessseeeeeeneeeneneeene nens 61 Using the phrase arpeggio function uuus 62 Creating your own arpeggio template User Template En 62 Using chord memory function eeee eee 64 Creating an original chor
204. ou want to synchronize the RS 50 with an external MIDI device Is the Tone Delay time value set to the note There is a maximum permissible value for the Delay Time parameter for such as 17 St DELAY So if the time setting is specified in terms of a note value and the tempo is slowed down this maximum permissible value will be reached and it cannot be increased further The upper time limit for each is the maximum value that can be set other than the numerical value for the beat Effect control does not work If you are using the C1 C2 C3 knobs in Performance mode to control MFX PARAMETER settings the MFX Source p 56 setting will determine the part whose effect will be controlled If MFX Source is set to Part1 16 the effect of that part will be controlled If MFX Source is set to PERFORM the System Perform Ctrl Ch Performance Control Channel p 90 setting will determine the part whose effect will be controlled If this setting is OFF no effect will be controlled Notes are delayed or unsteady during playback a song from an external sequencer The RS 50 contains some patches that are intended for live playing in Patch mode these include tones that use four voices for each note or patches that use the Dual function to produce rich sounds If you are using the RS 50 as a multitimbral sound module playback may be smoother if you avoid using such sounds and instead choose sounds that use f
205. ound and the pitch shift sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the pitch shift sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 0 127 Adjusts the output level Adding effects 26 GATED REVERB Gate Reverb is a special type of reverb in which the reverberant sound is cut off before its natural length Lin O T D 2 7 Gated Reverb O Balance D Rin Parameter Value Description Type NORMAL RE Selects the type of reverb VERSE NORMAL conventional gate re SWEEPI verb SWEEP2 REVERSE backwards reverb SWEEPI the reverberant sound moves from right to left SWEEP2 the reverberant sound moves from left to right Parameter Value Cho Delay 0 0 100 ms Description Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the modulation speed of the chorus effect Adjusts the modulation depth of the chorus effect Adjusts the volume balance be tween the overdrive sound that is sent through the chorus and the overdrive sound that is not sent through the chorus With a setting of D100 0W only the overdrive sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the overdrive sound that is sent through the chorus will be output Cho Rate Cho Depth 0 127 Cho Balance D100 0W D0 100
206. p3 8 FX Arp 2 8 BTS Arp 3 9 Flute Arp 4 9 BrghtPd Arp4 9 FX Arp 3 9 BTS Arp 4 Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Plucked 1 Harp Phr 1 Soft Pad 1 SoftPad Phr1 Other 1 Synth Phr 1 Combina 1 CMB Phr1 2 Harp Phr 2 D SoftPad Phr2 Synth 2 Synth Phr 2 tion 2 CMBPhr2 3 Harp Phr 3 3 SoftPad Phr3 3 Synth Phr 3 3 CMBArp1 4 Kalimba Phr 4 SoftPad Phr4 4 Synth Phr 4 4 CMB Arp2 5 Koto Phr 5 SoftPad Phr5 5 Synth Phr 5 5 CMB Arp3 6 PLK Arp 6 SoftPad Arp1 6 Synth Phr 6 6 CMB Arp 4 7 PLK Arp 2 7 SoftPad Arp2 vA Synth Phr 7 7 CMB Arp 5 8 PLK Arp 3 8 SoftPad Arp3 8 Synth Phr 8 8 CMB Arp6 9 PLK Arp 4 9 SoftPad Arp4 9 Synth Arp 9 CMB Arp7 Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Ethnic 1 Shamisen Phr Vox 1 Vox Phr 1 Bass 1 FngerBs Phr1 2 SitarGls Phr 2 Vox Phr 2 2 FngerBs Phr2 3 Bug Pipe Phr I3 Vox Phr 3 3 FngerBs Phr3 4 ShakuhatiPhr 4 Vox Phr 4 4 FngerBs Phr4 5 Mizmar Phr 5 Vox Phr 5 5 SlapBs Phr 1 6 Gamelan Phr 6 Vox Arp 1 6 SlapBs Phr 2 7 Tabla Phr 7 Vox Arp 2 uA FretlsBs Phr 8 Ethnic Arp 1 8 Vox Arp 3 8 AcBass Phr 9 Ethnic Arp2 9 Vox Arp 4 9 BsSlide Phr Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Fretted 1 Banjo Phr 1 Hard 1 Hard Ld Phr1 Synth 1 SynBass Phr1 2 Banjo Phr 2 Lead 2 Hard Ld Phr2 Bass 2 SynBass Phr2 3 Banjo Phr 3 3 Hard Ld Phr3 3 SynBass Phr3 4 Banjo Arp 1 4 Ha
207. patch performance various parameters etc in the display or to increase decrease a value While one of these buttons is first held down and the other is pressed the value then changes rapidly Or if you hold down SHIFT while using these buttons the value will change in larger steps Panel descriptions PAGE CURSOR lt gt JUMP buttons PAGE CURSOR Use these buttons to move between pages or to move the cursor p 42 JUMP In grouped pages you can hold down SHIFT and use these buttons to move between groups p 42 While one of these buttons is first held down and the other is pressed the page or cursor then moves rapidly EXIT button Press this button to return to the main screen of a mode or when you want to cancel the current operation ENTER button Use this button to finalize a value or execute an operation SHIFT button By holding down this button and pressing another button you can access a secondary function of that button printed below the button in square brackets TAP TEMPO button Adjusts the tempo according to the timing at which you tap this button You can also use VALUE to adjust the tempo if desired p 37 H PATCH MODIFY section DESTINATION TONE button Selects either UPPER or LOWER as the tone to be edited Patch Modify select button Selects whether the three knobs located at the right will edit the envelope or the balance and LFO
208. peggio template parameters as desired On the RS 50 you can store eight different user templates With 0 pressed use VALUE to select other user templates you have created For further information on how to make user templates refer to Creating your own arpeggio template User Template p 62 Playing a chord at the touch of a finger Multi chord Memory Chord Memory is a function that lets you play a chord simply by touching just one key to which a Chord Form has been registered On the RS 50 you can register different chord forms to each key and save these chord forms as sets multi chord memory and recall them when desired If you save typical chord progressions as user chord sets these are a convenient way to get immediate results such as when inputting music into the external sequencer 24 wn Twelve chord forms have been assigned from C to B Press CHORD MEMORY so it is lit The Chord Memory function will be turned on and the chord set name will be displayed Play the keyboard The chord of the specified structure will sound according to the note name of the key you played Try out the sounds E Switching chord sets Then try to change chord sets Ta EE NENNEN PERFORM PHRASE PATCH PATTERN SONG PARAM EFFECTS vm ARPEGGIO zs ETE e
209. po site directions SAW1 AW NNN SAW2 Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note 2 Adjusts the frequency speed of the change Depth 0 127 Sets the depth to which the ef fect is applied Delay Left 0 420 ms note 1 Adjusts the time from the direct sound until the left delay sound is heard Delay Right 0 420 ms note wi Adjusts the time from the direct sound until the right delay sound is heard Dly Feedback 98 98 7o Adjusts the proportion 6 of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Reset OFF ON This setting determines whether the period for the pattern is reset ON or not OFF when sounds are played While the rhythm guide is play ing the period for the pattern is not reset even if you set this ON Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 85 Effects note 1 Sixteenth note Js Eighth note triplet A Dotted sixteenth note Eighth note Jz Quarter note triplet JM Dotted eighth note J Quarter note dg Half note triplet J Dotted quarter note J Half note note 2 A Sixty fourth note triplet Sixty fourth note Ay thirty second note triplet Acthirty second note A Sixteenth note triplet A Dotted thirty second note Sixteenth note ds Eighth note triplet JM Dotted Sixteenth note J Eighth note 45 Quarte
210. pply to both the upper and lower tone ExpressionDst Expression Destination Specifies the tone that will be affected by expression VALUE UPPER Expression will apply only to the upper tone LOWER Expression will apply only to the lower tone BOTH Expression will apply to both the upper and lower tone Active Exp Sw Active Expression Switch Turns the active expression effect p 32 on off VALUE OFF Expression will affect only the volume as usual ON An active expression effect using both tones will be produced Making settings for an individual tone Patch Tone parameters You can set parameters that apply to each individual tone The panel DESTINATION TONE switch specifies which tone s upper lower will be affected by your settings p 26 MEM If BOTH is selected the value of the tone parameter assigned to the upper tone is displayed If you change this value the parameters for both Upper and Lower tones will be changed to the same values No Original Tone Number For each of the two tones upper and lower that make up a patch you can select one of 640 different original tones VALUE 0001 0640 Tone Pan Sets the pan position stereo location of each tone when stereo output is used With an increase in the value for L more of the sound will be heard as coming from the left side Similarly more of the sound will originate at the right if the value of R is increased VALUE L64 0
211. produce essentially the same musical performance General MIDI 2 The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 ffiigi2 lul recommendations pick up where the original General MIDI left off offering enhanced expressive capabilities and even greater compatibility Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations such as how sounds are to be edited and how effects should be handled have now been precisely defined Moreover the available sounds have been expanded General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo In some cases the conventional form of General MIDI which does not include the new enhancements is referred to as General MIDI 1 as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2 Panel descriptions Front panel zl d A D BEAM CONTROLLER You can apply a variety of effects to sounds simply by moving your hand p 31 SOLO SYNTH Solo Synthesizer button You can generate passages that sound as if you are rapidly playing the keyboard ACTIVE EXPRESS Active Expression button This lets you use the D Beam controller for Active Expression ASSIGNABLE button This lets you assign a desired function to the D Beam controller p
212. put and with a setting of D0 100W only the pitch shift sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 24 FB PCH SHIFT Feedback Pitch Shifter This pitch shifter allows the pitch shifted sound to be fed back into the effect L in Rin CO Balance D Balance W OO Pitch Shifter BEL ee Al CT Balance W Feedback O 2 Balance D Parameter Value Description Mode 1 2 3 4 5 Higher settings of this parame ter will result in slower re sponse but steadier pitch Coarse 1 24 12 semi Adjusts the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Fine 1 100 100 cent Makes fine adjustments to the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in 2 cent steps 100 100 cents Pre Delay 0 500 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the pitch shifted sound is heard Feedback 98 98 96 Adjusts the proportion of the processed sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Pan L64 63R Adjusts the stereo location of the pitch shifted sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency 25 REVERB The Reverb effect adds reverberation to the sound simulating an acoustic space L in O
213. quency of Middle 2 mid range Mid2 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 This parameter adjusts the width of the area around the Middle 2 Frequency that will be affected by the Gain setting Higher values of Q will result in a narrower area being affected Mid2 Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain for the area specified by the Middle 2 Fre quency and Q settings Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 02 OVERDRIVE This effect creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by vacuum tube amplifiers gt L out LI PanL Y PanR gt R out Parameter Value Description Drive ft 0 127 Adjusts the degree of distortion The volume will change togeth er with the degree of distortion Pan L64 63R Adjusts the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Amp Type SMALL Selects the type of guitar amp BUILT IN SMALL small amp 2 STACK BUILT IN single unit type amp 3 STACK 2 STACK single unit type amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 69 Effects 03 DISTORTION This effect produces a more intense distortion than Overdrive L in gt L out Simulator Y Pan R Rin gt R out Parameter Value Description D
214. r interrupted while data is being written to memory the internal data may become corrupted 1 Press PATCH so it is lit and you are in Patch mode 2 Press UTILITY so it is lit 3 Use PAGE CURSOR to select 5 FACTORY RESET 4 Press ENTER 5 Press ENTER again to execute the Factory Reset When the display indicates COMPLETED the factory reset operation has been completed PATCH MODIFY If there is important data you ve created that s stored in the RS 50 s internal memory you must note that all such data will be discarded when a Factory Reset is performed If you want to keep the existing data save it using an external sequencer p 98 MEN Press EXIT to cancel the factory reset MEN Factory Reset can be executed not only from Patch mode but also from the Utility functions of Performance mode p 61 17 Listening to the demo songs The RS 50 contains Demo songs Here s how to listen to the demo songs and experience the superb sounds and effects of the RS 50 1 Press DEMO 2 Use VALUE to select the song that you wish to hear If you want to listen to all of the songs played in order select All Songs 3 Press ENTER to start demo song playback The selected song is played back repeatedly When All Songs is selected the entire s
215. r no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About N WARNING and Z CAUTION Notices Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe Z WARNING injury should the unit be used A improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly CAUTION Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets About the Symbols The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the unit must never be disassembled The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power
216. r note triplet Jh Dotted eighth note J Quarter note dg Half note triplet Dotted quarter note d Half note o3 Whole note triplet d Dotted half note 9 Whole note ap Double note triplet Dotted whole note 101 Double note Making chorus settings Regardless of the mode only one type of chorus can be used simultaneously There are eight types of chorus You can select any one of these After selecting the Type you can change the values for each of the parameters Type Chorus Type You can choose from 8 types of chorus Value CHORUS 1 4 General chorus settings Adds breadth and fullness to the sound FEEDBACK CHORUS Chorus that produces a flanger like effect creating a soft sound FLANGER This effect produces a rising and falling sweep reminiscent of a jet airplane SHORT DELAY This is a delay with a short delay time SHORT DELAY FB Thisisa delay with a short delay time and many repeats MEM Chorus Type provides several preset like example settings of the chorus parameters When you switch types the other chorus parameters will change according to the settings of the type you select If you intend to edit the other parameters select a type first and then edit the other parameters Pre LPF Chorus pre low pass filter A low pass filter can be applied to the sound coming into the chorus to cut the high frequency range Higher values will cut more of the high frequenci
217. r outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire e At regular intervals you should unplug the AC Q Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled Also all cords and cables should be N placed so they are out of the reach of children e Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on the unit S e Never handle the AC adaptor body or its output 1 plugs with wet hands when plugging into or S unplugging from an outlet or this unit e Before moving the unit disconnect the AC adaptor and all cords coming from external devices Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet p 16 e Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area disconnect the AC adaptor from the 1 outlet Should you remove the ground terminal screw make sure to put it in a safe place out of children s Q reach so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally IMPORTANT NOTES In addition to the items listed under USING THE UNIT SAFELY on page 2 3 please read and observe the following Power Supply Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any device that will generate line noise such as an electric motor or variable lighting system The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long hours of consecutive use This is normal and is not a cause for concern Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to a
218. r with Aftertouch messages Receiving these control change message from the MIDI IN connector produces the same effect as operating the modulation lever When set to MEX PARAMETERI or MFX PARAMETER2 be sure to note the following When the multi effects Type is set to 01 STEREO EQ p 69 or 42 LOFI p 83 Level is changed regardless of whether MFX PARAMETER or MFX PARAMETER is selected When making the LFO RATE LFO DEPTH or LFO DELAY settings the effect achieved differs depending on whether FILTER LFO is on or off When FILTER LFO is off the LFO alters the pitch vibrato effect When FILTER LFO is on the LFO changes the Filter Cutoff frequency wah effect 89 lt S e E Ww E 7 m 2 gt n Settings common to all modes System Function Pedal Pedal Control Assign This specifies the function of the pedal connected to the CONTROL PEDAL jack VALUE In addition to the items listed in Modulation Assign you can use the pedal to apply the following effects TAP TEMPO Use the pedal to make tap tempo settings p 37 C1 C1 Knob Assign C2 C2 Knob Assign C3 C3 Knob Assign Select the effects that will be controlled by the C1 C2 C3 knobs VALUE In addition to the items listed in Modulation Assign you can use the pedal to apply the following effects PATCH MODIFY The effect indicated on the panel will be controlled p 26 f you assign any effects other than PATCH
219. r5 5 TekSyn Phr 5 5 Pere Arp 1 6 Hit Arp 1 6 SynBrassArp1 6 TekSyn Arp 1 6 Pere Arp 2 7 Hit Arp2 7 SynBrassArp2 7 TekSyn Arp 2 7 Perc Arp3 8 Hit Arp3 8 SynBrassArp3 8 TekSyn Arp 3 8 Pere Arp 4 9 Hit Arp 4 9 SynBrassArp4 9 TekSyn Arp 4 9 Perc Arp5 Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Wind 1 ClarinetPhr1 Sax 1 Sax Phr 1 Pulsating 1 Plsatng Phr1 Sound FX 1 Car Pass Phr 2 ClarinetPhr2 2 Sax Phr2 2 Plsatng Phr2 2 FootStep Phr 3 Oboe Phr 1 3 Sax Phr3 3 Plsatng Phr3 3 Heart Bt Phr 4 Oboe Phr2 4 Sax Phr 4 4 Plsatng Phr4 4 SFX Arp1 5 Oboe Phr 3 5 Sax Phr 5 5 Plsatng Phr5 5 SFX Am 6 Wind Arp 1 6 Sax Arp 1 6 Plsatng Arp1 6 SFX Arp 3 7 Wind Arp 2 7 Sax Arp 2 7 Plsatng Arp2 7 SFXArp4 8 Wind Arp 3 8 Sax Arp 3 8 Plsatng Arp3 8 SFX Arp5 9 Wind Arp 4 9 Sax Arp 4 9 Plsatng Arp4 9 SFX Arp 6 Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name Category Button Name E Flute 1 Flute Phr 1 Bright Pad 1 BrghtPd Phr1 Synth FX 1 FX Phr 1 Beat amp 1 BTS Phr 1 2 Flute Phr 2 2 BrghtPd Phr2 2 FX Phr2 Groove 2 BTS Phr 2 amp 3 Flute Phr 3 3 BrghtPd Phr3 3 FX Phr3 3 BTS Phr 3 lt 4 Flute Phr 4 4 BrghtPd Phr4 4 FX Phr 4 4 BTS Phr 4 5 Piccolo Phr 5 BrghtPd Phr5 5 FX Phr 5 5 BTS Phr 5 6 Flute Arp 1 6 BrghtPd Arp1 6 FX Phr 6 6 BTS Arp 1 7 Flute Arp 2 7 BrghtPd Arp2 7 FX Arp 1 7 BTS Arp2 8 Flute Arp 3 8 BrghtPd Ar
220. rameters p 52 Parameters Value Name Rhythm Set Name space A Z a z 0 9 1 amp 2 Q Y UT Rhythm Tone parameters p 52 Parameters Value Pitch 60 67 Level 0 127 Pan RND L63 63R Chorus Send Lvl Chorus Send Level 0 127 Reverb Send Lvl Reverb Send Level 0 127 Performance parameters Performance Common parameters p 56 Parameters Value Name Performance Name space A Z a z 0 9 1 amp lt gt _ II Voice Rsv 1 16 Voice Reserve 1 16 0 32 Level Performance Level 0 127 MEX Source PERFORM PART1 PART16 Performance Effects parameters Parameters Value Multi effects group Type Multi Effects Type 00 THROUGH 47 FBK RIPPER Multi effects Parameters The number of parameters varies depending on the Multi effects Type Refer to Setting multi effects parameters p 68 Send Lvl to Cho Multi effect send level to chorus 0 127 Send Lvl to Rev Multi effect send level to reverb 0 127 Ctrl 1 Multi Effects Control 1 Refer to Setting multi effects parameters p 68 Ctrl 2 Multi Effects Control 2 Refer to Setting multi effects parameters p 68 Chorus effects group Type Chorus type CHORUSI CHORUS CHORUS3 CHORUS4 FEEDBACK CHORUS FLANGER SHORT DELAY SHORT DELAY FB Pre LPF Chorus pre low pass filter 0 7 Level Choru
221. rd Ld Phr4 4 SynBass Phr4 5 Banjo Arp 2 5 Hard Ld Phr5 5 SynBass Phr5 6 Banjo Arp 3 6 Hard Ld Arp1 6 SynBass Phr6 7 Fretted Arp1 7 Hard Ld Arp2 7 SynBass Phr7 8 Fretted Arp2 8 Hard Ld Arp3 8 SynBass Phr8 9 Fretted Arp3 9 Hard Ld Arp4 9 SynBass Phr9 121 Arpeggio style list No Name Variation No Name Variation No Name Variation No Name Variation 01 Note Values 12 26 16 Sync1 3 5 51 A Gt Backing 8 76 Ac amp E Bass 12 02 1 8 Basic1 5 27 16 Sync1 4 5 52 E Gt Phr 5 77 Synth Bs 11 03 1 8 Basic 2 5 28 16 Sync2 1 5 53 E Gt Backing 5 78 Drum Phr 10 04 1 8 Basic 3 5 29 16 Sync2 2 5 54 D Gt Phr 6 79 Perc Phr 5 05 1 8 Basic 4 5 30 16 Sync2 3 5 55 D Gt Backing 4 80 SFX Phr 4 06 1 8 Sync 1 1 5 31 16 Sync2 4 5 56 Str amp Orc Phr 12 81 BTS Phr 6 07 1 8 Sync 1 2 5 32 16 Drive 1 5 57 Hit amp Stab Phr 6 82 CMB Phr 3 08 1 8 Sync 1 3 5 33 16 Drive 2 5 58 Wind Phr 6 09 1 8 Sync 1 4 5 34 16 Drive 3 5 59 Flute Phr 6 0 1 8 Sync 2 1 5 35 16 Drive 4 5 60 Plucked Phr 6 1 1 8 Sync 2 2 5 36 Rhythmix 1 5 61 Ethnic Phr 8 2 1 8 Sync 2 3 5 37 Rhythmix 2 5 62 Banjo Phr 4 3 1 8Sync2 4 5 38 Piano Phr 6 63 BanjoBacking
222. rive 0 127 Adjusts the degree of distortion The volume will change togeth er with the degree of distortion Pan L64 63R Adjusts the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Amp Type SMALL Selects the type of guitar amp BUILT IN 2 SMALL small amp STACK 3 BUILT IN single unit type amp STACK 2 STACK single unit type amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 04 PHASER A phaser adds a phase shifted sound to the direct sound producing a twisting modulation that creates spaciousness and depth 05 SPECTRUM Spectrum is a type of filter which modifies the timbre by boosting or cutting the level at specific frequencies Itis similar to an equalizer but has 8 frequency points fixed at locations most suitable for adding character to the sound Lin gt L out Pan L Pan R R in gt R out Parameter Value Description Band 1 15 15 dB Adjusts the 250 Hz level Band 2 15 15 dB Adjusts the 500 Hz level Band 3 15 15 dB Adjusts the 1000 Hz level Band 4 15 15 dB Adjusts the 1250 Hz level Band 5 15 15 dB Adjusts the 2000 Hz level Band 6 15 15 dB Adjusts the 3150 Hz level Band 7 15 15 dB Adju
223. rom this connector to an external device PEDAL jacks CONTROL An optional expression pedal such as the EV 5 pedal switch the optional DP 2 or DP 8 or foot switch the optional BOSS FS 5U can be connected to this jack p 14 HOLD An optional pedal switch such as the DP 2 or DP 8 or foot switch the optional BOSS FS 5U can be connected to this jack for use as a hold pedal p 14 MEM If you are using DP 8 set the DP 8 s function switch to Switch C OUTPUT jacks These jacks output stereo L R audio signals to your amp or mixer For mono output use the L jack D PHONES jack This is the jack for connecting headphones sold separately p 14 Cord hook To prevent the inadvertent disruption of power to your unit should the plug be pulled out accidentally and to avoid applying undue stress to the DC IN jack anchor the power cord using the cord hook as shown in the illustration DC IN USE ROLAND ACI OR PSB 1U ADAPTOR ONLY Cord Hook The cord of the supplied AC Adaptor To the Power Outlet F DC IN jack Connect the AC adaptor here p 14 Be sure to use only the supplied AC adaptor G POWER switch This switch turns the power on off p 15 H Ground terminal Depending on the circumstances of a particular setup you may experience a discomforting sensation or perceive that the surface feels gritty to the touch when you tou
224. ropriate for each sound You can edit the patches to adjust the speed of the LFO effect and the depth to which it will affect the pitch and filter cutoff frequency ore You cannot simultaneously adjust the pitch depth and cutoff depth Nor can you adjust the depth of the LFO effect on volume If you need to use an adjustable tremolo effect use the TREMOLO multi effect p 84 Filter LFO Filter LFO Switch Selects whether the LFO Depth setting will control the depth of cutoff frequency modulation or of pitch modulation This is linked with the operation of the FILTER LFO switch of the panel p 27 VALUE OFF PCH You can adjust the depth of the LFO s effect on pitch ON FLT You can adjust the depth of the LFO s effect on the filter cutoff frequency LFO Rate Adjusts the modulation rate or speed of the LFO This is linked with the operation of the LFO RATE knob of the panel p 27 VALUE 64 63 Patch Mode LFO Depth Specifies the depth of LFO Normally the depth of the LFO s effect on pitch will change If Filter LFO is ON the LFO s effect on cutoff frequency will change This is linked with the operation of the LFO DEPTH knob of the panel p 27 VALUE 64 63 LFO Delay Adjusts the time from when the key is pressed or released until the LFO begins to be applied or the duration that the effect continues VALUE 64 63 Adjusting the brightness or hardness of the sound Filter The so
225. rsally shared MIDI specifications it would not be possible to transmit messages that are unique to a particular manufacturer or that are designed specifically for a certain device For this reason MIDI allows for an exclusive format for each manufacturer which can be used to exchange a variety of messages On the RS 50 you can use Exclusive messages to store Patch settings and other data to sequencers p 98 About MIDI Implementation Charts Although a variety of messages for performances can be handled using MIDI depending on the functions of the connected device the messages that can be sent and received may differ To see which types of MIDI message a device can transmit and receive refer to the MIDI Implementation Chart that is included in the manual of each device Messages which are marked by a circle in the charts of both devices can be transmitted between the two devices Using the RS 50 to play an external MIDI sound module By connecting the RS 50 to an external MIDI sound module with a MIDI cable and setting the channels the external MIDI module can be used to produce sound when you play the RS 50 s keyboard Connecting to external MIDI sound PE gt modules 8 a Example 1 Connecting to one external MIDI sound module zz EE SE MIDI IN Lo oo see D Sound Module A i MIDI OUT E MIDI IN E a MIDI THRU Lo oo N
226. s ENTER All data stored in the user area will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector When the display indicates COMPLETED the transmission operation has been completed MEM If you want to restore the stored data into the RS 50 once again send the data to the RS 50 s MIDI IN Do not operate the RS 50 while this data is being received Restoring the factory settings FACTORY RESET You can also perform the FACTORY RESET operation from Performance Utility For more about FACTORY RESET refer to Reset to default factory settings Factory Reset p 17 o o oO E G E s o n Using the phrase arpeggio function The RS 50 provides arpeggio templates that use phrases suitable for each category of instrument Some of the arpeggio templates are phrase templates which let you produce arpeggios with a single finger without having to hold down a chord IS Playing arpeggios Phrase Arpeggio p 23 1 Press PHRASE ARPEGGIO so it is lit 2 Press 0 9 to choose the arpeggio template you want to use Play a chord on the keyboard An arpeggio will begin playing according to the notes in the chord you play Select a template or style you like MEM If you select a phrase template press only one key If you play a chord the phrase will play according to the last played key 3 To stop the arpeggio performance press PHRASE ARPEGGIO on
227. s E 20 Applying various effects to the sound 26 Using the Rhythm Guide eeeeeesseeeeeeeeee 36 Advanced Use eee eee kee ee een DO Overview of the RS 50 leere reels esee eren eren nnne nnns 40 How the instrument is organized EEN 40 Classification of RS 50 sound ypes eo eao onae eE E tenent nennen tenens 40 EC 41 Nutiber OF VOlces incite hte ceat e re re a D UR D s e i e e ERE RAN a ote 41 About Temobyz cnin esteem no dde edes e steer vides rah Oe risiede iSt nte eae stars sd 41 isnociadusu m 41 Rewritable Memory zi sitem ee eege at hv pestes 41 Noncrewritable memory i c hbro enam tad de e eden i e aig dts 41 Basic operation of the RS 50 cccceeeeeeeeessseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeenees 42 Switching the modestus eemper esq eda oed edu same epe dis ese cov need se er Ree tgo ta 42 Patch mode 5 nte E A en en ede a em tad 42 Performance mode viii netter hte emere epe Daisey Dee ath ee de rede eaput ea i 42 Editing parameters 55 ente ee OE RARE pe RE IHRER AIRE e ed 42 Basiceprocedu te aieo eiecti ibt eda b frappe idee athe euenit 42 Executing a command ates Needed tet nete tee tae da 42 Assine a name AE 43 When one page contains two or more settings E 43 Inputting numbers and numerals een 43 Sel
228. s Level 0 127 Feedback Chorus Feedback Level 0 127 Delay Chorus Delay Time 0 127 Rate Chorus Rate 0 127 Depth Chorus Depth 0 127 107 Appendix Parameter list Parameters Value Send LvI to Rev Chorus send level to reverb 0 127 Reverb effects group Type Reverb Type ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 HALL1 HALL2 PLATE DELAY PANNING DELAY Character Reverb Character 0 7 Pre LPF Reverb pre low pass filter 0 7 Level Reverb Level 0 127 Time Reverb Time 0 127 Delay Feedback Reverb Delay Feedback 0 127 Performance Part Setup parameters p 56 Parameters Value Level Part Level 0 127 Pan Part Pan RND L63 63R Receive Ch Receive Channel 1 16 Receive Sw Receive Switch OFF ON Receive Prg Chg Receive Program Change Switch OFF ON Receive Bank Sel Receive Bank Select Switch OFF ON PART SCALE group Type Part Scale Tune Type EQUAL JUST maj in C JUST min in C ARABIC Tune C TuneB Part Scale Tune C B 64 63 System parameters p 89 Parameters Value GENERAL group LCD Contrast 1 10 Master Tune 415 3 466 2 Master Key Sft Master Key Shift 24 24 Master Level 0 127 Hold Pedal Hold Pedal Polarity STANDARD REVERSE Local Control Local Controller OFF ON Clock Source INT MIDI CONTROLLER group Mod Modula
229. s are always available in the RS 50 You can independently edit each effect s settings i S x KS 5 S Multi Effects The RS 50 contains 47 different multi effects including distortion and a rotary speaker simulation Chorus Chorus adds a sense of depth and spaciousness to patches Reverb Reverb adds ambient characteristics that emulate the sound of various physical spaces such as concert halls or auditoriums E Turning effects on and off Master Effects Switch PATCH MODIFY Turn on a switch to enable the corresponding effect multi effect chorus reverb You may wish to turn these switches off when you want to listen to the unprocessed sound while editing it or if you are using an external effects processor and do not want to use the built in effects MEMO When shipped from the factory all three effects are set to ON The On Off settings for 1 Press PATCH so it is lit and you are in Patch mode each Effect affect the RS 50 as a whole i e are system 2 Press EFFECTS so it is lit settings This setting The on off state of each effect multi effect chorus reverb will be displayed remains stored in memory even while the power is off 3 Use PAGE CURSOR 4 to select the effect type and use VALUE to turn to switch it on off When you play the keyboard in thi
230. s correct p 89 Are the Master Tune settings correct p 89 Sounds are missing Could a Solo switch be set to ON When a Solo switch p 46 is on only one sound is played even when more than one key is pressed If you want multiple sounds to play simultaneously set the Solo switch to OFF Are you attempting to play more than 64 voices simultaneously Reduce the number of notes that are played simultaneously Set Voice Reserve higher for an important Part to help assure that it will always be sounded p 56 102 Troubleshooting Effects not being applied correctly Are the master effects switches set to OFF p 65 Are the Chorus settings correct Check the Chorus Level p 86 Chorus Depth p 87 and Chorus Send Level p 46 p 58 settings Are the Reverb settings correct Check the Reverb Level p 87 and Reverb Send Level p 46 p 58 settings Are the Chorus or Reverb settings for the rhythm set correct Check the Chorus Send Level p 53 and Reverb Send Level p 53 settings for each note of the rhythm set Is any Multi Effects switch set to BYPASS Set the Multi Effects switch for the part being used to ON p 46 p 58 Are the Multi Effects Source setting correct p 56 Is the Clock Source set to MIDI If you set the clock source p 89 to MIDI some of the effects that are synchronized with the tempo will not work Set the clock source to INT except when y
231. s effect connects a chorus and a flanger in series L in Balance D Balance D Balance D Balance D Parameter Value Description Cho Delay 0 0 100 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard Cho Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the modulation speed of the chorus effect Cho Depth 0 127 Adjusts the modulation depth of the chorus effect Cho Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Flg Delay 0 0 100 ms Adjusts the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Flg Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the modulation speed of the flanger effect Flg Depth 0 127 Adjusts the modulation depth of the flanger effect Flg Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flg Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the chorus sound and the chorus sound that is passed through the flanger With a setting of D100 0W only the chorus sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound that passes throug
232. s not compatible with song data that uses formats other than General MIDI 2 or General MIDI 103 Troubleshooting Cannot play phrase arpeggios Is the MIDI clock not being received when Clock Source p 89 is set to MIDI Set the system so that the MIDI clock is received from the external MIDI device Certain MIDI devices you may have connected may not send the MIDI clock to the RS 50 except during recording or playback Sound does not stop when key is pressed Is the Hold Pedal Polarity reversed p 89 MIDI messages not received correctly Are the Patch Receive channel settings correct p 90 Is each Receive switch set correctly Check the Performance Control Channel p 90 Receive Program Change switch p 90 Receive Bank Select switch p 90 Receive System Exclusive switch p 90 settings Are Device ID number settings correct Set the Device ID number p 91 used when the Exclusive message was recorded to the sequencer Is the sequencer playback tempo correct Play back the data on the sequencer at the tempo used when the Exclusive message was recorded to the sequencer MIDI messages not transmitted correctly Are the Patch transmission channel settings correct p 95 Is each Transmission switch set correctly Check the Transmit Program Change switch p 90 Transmit Bank Select switch p 90 Transmit Edit Data switch p 91 Transmit Active Sensing switch p 91 settings 104
233. s state the effects whose master effect switch is turned on will be applied to the patches When the cursor is located at Rev and you want to edit the effect settings press PAGE CURSOR L and the effect parameters will be displayed one after another starting with the multi effect MFX parameters For further information refer to Making effects settings p 67 35 Using the Rhythm Guide The Rhythm Guide provides an easy way to produce full fledged rhythm patterns as easily as using a metronome Performance mode p 55 The Rhythm Guide can be used only in Performance mode which lets you perform on the keyboard while using drum sounds simultaneously Selecting a rhythm pattern PATCH MODIFY 1 Press PERFORM so it is lit and you are in Performance mode 2 Press RHYTHM GUIDE so it is lit If you want to change the The rhythm pattern will begin playing part that you will play along with the rhythm 3 With the display showing the pattern name use VALUE to select a Buide cores PART EE SELECT so it is lit then 4 Once again press RHYTHM GUIDE so it is unlit the rhythm pattern will use 1 9 to select the part stop category that you want to play from the keyboard To select a rhythm pattern without playing it 1 Press PERFORM so it is lit and you are in Performance mode Press RHYTHM GUIDE while holding down SHIFT
234. se PAGE CURSOR to move through the characters and use VALUE to finalize the desired character Value space A Z a z 0 9 1 amp lt gt e Y l IS For further information refer to Assigning a name p 43 Voice Rsv 1 16 Voice Reserve 1 16 The sound generator of the RS 50 can produce up to 64 notes voices simultaneously If data is received that attempts to play more than this number of voices notes will be dropped out The RS 50 has a voice reserve setting that lets you allocate a minimum number of voices for each part For example if you set Voice Reserve to 10 for part 16 ten voices each for upper and lower tones will be allocated for part 16 even if the total number of voices being sounded by the RS 50 reaches the maximum of 64 In this way consider the number of sounds you want to play and the number of tones in the patch you are using and set the Voice Reserve of each part accordingly Value 0 32 Mp You cannot make settings that would cause the total of all parts to exceed 32 Level Performance Level Specifies the volume of the performance Value 0 127 MFX Source When the MFX effect is applied in Performance mode this specifies whether the effect will use the parameters of the performance itself or the parameters of the patch assigned to the part p 65 VALUE PERFORM The MFX effect will be applied according t
235. side Similarly more of the sound will originate at the right if the value of R is increased When set to RND random you obtain a specialized effect whereby the sound randomly moves left and right with each key stroke Value RND L63 0 63R Playing more than one sound simultaneously Performance mode Receive Ch Receive Channel Part Patch Edit In Performance mode the RS 50 will operate as a sixteen part MIDI multitimbral sound module This parameter specifies the MIDI receive channel for each part iz sii E i Pid Value 1 16 The patch assigned to each part can also be edited from Performance Each part of a performance is set to the following channels unless mode You can press ENTER and edit the patch parameters and you change them save the patch in the same way as from Patch mode p 44 PART 1 PIANO Ch 1 If you decide to stop editing the patch press EXIT to return to the PART 2 KBD amp ORGAN Ch 2 above screen PART 3 GUITAR Ch 3 PART 4 ORCH Ch 4 PART 5 WORLD Ch 5 s n PART 6 BRASS Ch 6 Patch mode and Performance mode share the same patches PART 7 VOCAL amp PAD Ch7 This means that if you save a patch in one of these modes the PART 8 SYNTH Ch8 newly saved patch will sound if you select it in the other mode PART 9 BASS Cho To avoid problems such as unintended changes in the sound of PART 10 0 RHYTHM amp SEX cun patches you are using in Performance mode
236. sion Switch p 46 of the patch is turned OFF this will be conventional expression volume change A You will hear no sound if you play the keyboard when Active Expression has set the volume to 0 32 Applying various effects to the sound ASSIGNABLE Specifies a function controlled by the D Beam controller Use VALUE and select one of the following functions ZS Value Tx CC Function Parameter Changed g MODULATION CC Vibrato Effect PORTA TIME CC05 Portamento Time p 47 VOLUME CC07 Level BALANCE CC08 The volume balance of LOWER and UP PER tones p 45 PAN CC10 Pan p 46 EXPRESSION CC11 Level PORTAMENTO CC65 Portamento Switch p 47 SOSTENUTO CC66 Holds the sound of the key being pressed SOFT CC67 Softens the Tone RESONANCE CC71 Tone Filter Resonance p 48 RELEASE TIME CC72 Tone Envelope Release Time p 48 ATTACK TIME CC73 Tone Envelope Attack Time p 48 CUTOFF CC74 Tone Filter Cutoff p 47 DECAY TIME CC75 Tone Envelope Decay Time p 48 LFO RATE CC76 Tone LFO Rate p 47 LFO DEPTH CC77 Tone LFO Depth p 47 LFO DELAY CC78 Tone LFO Delay p 47 CHO SEND LEVEL CC93 Chorus Send Level p 46 REV SEND LEVEL CC91 Reverb Send Level p 46 MFX PARAMETER1 CC12 The parameter specified by Multi effect Control 1 p 69 MFX PARAMETER2 CC13 The parameter specified by Multi effect Control 2 p 69 AFTERTOUCH
237. ssion pedal the optional EV 5 pedal switch the optional DP 2 8 or foot switch the optional BOSS FS 5U connected to the CONTROL PEDAL jack you can then use the pedal to make changes in the tone MEMO Just as with the Modulation lever you can select the function affected when the If you are using DP 8 set pedal is pressed the DP 8 s function switch For further information refer to Pedal Pedal Control Assign p 90 to Switch L PEDAL CONTROL HOLD When you want to apply the effect that causes the sounds being played to continue playing called the hold effect connect a pedal switch the optional DP 2 8 or foot switch the optional BOSS FS 5U to the PEDAL HOLD jack Shifting the keyboard range in one octave steps Octave Shift Octave Shift is a function that shifts the pitch of the keyboard in one octave units This lets you shift the range of the keyboard to the most convenient range for playing This is also convenient in a situation below When playing sounds outside the keyboard s range While the RS 50 features a 61 key keyboard with some songs you may want to play notes even higher or lower Also when playing a Rhythm Set etc there may be percussion instruments that the RS 50 s keyboard is not able to access In such cases you can use the Transpose function to play these notes PATCH MODIFY
238. sts the 4000 Hz level Band 8 15 15 dB Adjusts the 8000 Hz level Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 Simultaneously adjusts the 8 0 width of the adjusted areas for all the frequency bands Pan L64 63R Adjusts the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 06 ENHANCER The enhancer controls the overtone structure of the high frequencies adding sparkle and tightness to the sound Lin ER 2 Band gt L out Mix 2 Band Rin ga sae O eo R out Parameter Value Description Sens 0 127 Adjusts the sensitivity of the en hancer Mix st 0 127 Adjusts the ratio with which the overtones generated by the en hancer are combined with the direct sound Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level L in gt L out PanL o aaa Y Pan R Rin Resonance R out Parameter Value Description Manual 100 8000 Hz Adjusts the basic frequency from which the sound will be modulated Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Adjusts the frequency period of modulation Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of modula tion Resonance 0 127 Adjusts the amount of feedback for the phaser Mix 0 127 Adjusts the ratio with which the phase shifted sound is com bined with the direct sound Pan
239. t switch KEY MODE to DUAL and turn the PATCH MODIFY section s BALANCE knob all the way to the L position Turn Effects off p 65 Since the RS 50 s effects have such a profound impact on its sounds turn them off to listen to the sound itself so you can better evaluate the changes you re making Since you will hear the original sound of the patch itself when the effects are turned off the results of your modifications will be easier to hear Actually sometimes just changing effects settings can give you the sound you want How to make the patch settings Including the parameters that can be controlled from the panel a patch consists of the following types of settings Settings used by the entire patch Patch Common Settings for each patch Patch Tone Collectively these are referred to as patch parameters Changing the way that the tones are sounded Key Mode KEY MODE SINGLE C SPLIT DUAL On the RS 50 the sound of each patch is produced by combining two tones the upper tone and the lower tone p 40 The KEY MODE setting lets you specify how these two tones will be sounded when you play the keyboard MEM This setting is also valid when using Patch Audition SINGLE The upper tone is played by all keys on the keyboard SPLIT The keyboard will be split the lower range plays the lower tone and the upper range plays the upper tone MEM You can change the point at which the lower
240. t button Among the user patches organized into category groups you can also view a list of just the user patches Hold down SHIFT and press to switch categories and after the Bass category you will see the user patches u001 u128 displayed as a category DA Only when viewing a list the u at the beginning of user patch numbers will be displayed as a lowercase character Selecting performance numbers Press PART SELECT so it will go out Using VALUE V 4 Pressing VALUE will select the performance that precedes or follows the currently selected performance You do not need to press ENTER after making your selection The number you select will take effect immediately and the performance will be selected Using the direct access buttons When not using the NUMERIC function Use the 0 9 buttons to input a number The upper digit will remain fixed and only the lower digit will change This is a convenient way to step through the numbers in succession You do not need to press ENTER after making your selection The number you select will take effect immediately and the performance will be selected When using the NUMERIC function Press NUMERIC so it is lit Use the 0 9 buttons to input a two digit number The indication will blink If you want to finalize the value press ENTER The value will be finalized and NUMERIC will go out If you decide to cancel press E
241. tWhistle EXC3 _ 1 ShortWhistle EXC3 _ 1 ShortWhistle EXC3 1 C572 LongWhistle2 EXC3 1 LongWhistle2 EXC3 1 LongWhistle2 EXC3 1 LongWhistle2 EXC3 1 LongWhistle2 EXC3 1 al Guiro Short EXC4 1 Guiro Sw 1 Guiro Sw 1 Guiro Sw 1 Cowbell 1 74 Guiro Long EXC4 1 Castanets 2 2 Castanets 2 2 Castanets 2 2 Vibraslap 1 CR claves 1 Claves 1 Claves 1 Claves 1 Claves 1 76 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 77 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 Woodblock 1 LEE Cuica Mute EXC5 1 Cuica Sw 1 Cuica Sw 1 Cuica Sw 1 Castanets 2 2 79 Cuica Open EXC5 1 Shaker Sw 1 Shaker Sw 1 Shaker Sw 1 Cuica Sw 1 i Triangl Mt 1 EXC6 1 Triangl Mt 1 EXC6 1 Triangl Mt 1 EXC6 1 Triangl Mt 1 EXC6 1 Triangl Mt 1 EXO6 1 81 Triangl Op 1 EXC6 1 Triangl Op 1 EXC6 1 Triangl Op 1 EXC 6 1 Triangl Op 1 EXC 6 1 Triangl Op 1 EXC6 1 EA Shaker 1 1 Bell Tree 1 Bell Tree 1 Bell Tree 1 Shaker Sw 1 83 Jingle Bell 1 Jingle Bell 1 Jingle Bell 1 Jingle Bell 1 Jingle Bell 1 cel84 WindChimeDwn 1 WindChimeDwn 1 WindChimeDwn 1 WindChimeDwn 1 Bell Tree 1 E Castanets 2 2 W ChimeShort 1 W ChimeShort 1 W ChimeShort 1 WindChimeDwn 1 86 Surdo Mute EXC7 1 Surdo Mute EXC7 1 Surdo Mute EXC7 1 Surdo Mute EXC7 1 W ChimeShort 1 CEA Surdo Open EXC7 1 Surdo Open EXC7 1 Surdo Open EXC7 1 Surdo Open EXC7 1 Bird 2 88 FingerSnap 1 FingerSnap 1 FingerSnap 1 FingerSnap 1 Church Bell 1 89 TR909 Clap 2
242. table parameter the cursor underline will blink below its value Now you can use VALUE to modify the value of that patch parameter cursor Selecting rhythm set parameters RHYTHM COMMON r SHIFT SHIFT PAGE PAGE CURSOR p PAGE PAGE CURSOR al CURSOR gt CURSOR Lal RHYTHM TONE PAGE PAGE CURSOR gt CURSOR Lal PAGE CURSOR Lal PAGE CURSOR gt Making settings that apply to the entire rhythm set Rhythm Common parameters You can edit the following Rhythm Common parameters Name Rhythm Set Name You can change the name of the rhythm set Here you can use PAGE CURSOR lt to move through the characters and use VALUE to finalize the desired character Value space A Z a z 0 9 1 amp lt gt e II US For further information refer to Assigning a name p 43 SC the settings of each rhythm tone key Rhythm Tone parameters A rhythm set assigns a different instrument to each key For each of these instrumental sounds you can edit the following parameters Press a key to select the rhythm tone that you want to edit e 8E 5ES OO i Pitch Adjusts the pitch of the percussive sound in semitone steps VALUE 60 67 Level Specifies the volume of t
243. te 1 direct sound until when delay 2 sound is heard Delay 3 0 840 ms Adjusts the time delay from the note 1 direct sound until when delay 3 sound is heard Delay 4 0 840 ms Adjusts the time delay from the note 1 direct sound until when delay 4 sound is heard Level 1 0 127 Adjusts the volume of delay 1 sound Level 2 0 127 Adjusts the volume of delay 2 sound Level 3 0 127 Adjusts the volume of delay 3 sound Level 4 0 127 Adjusts the volume of delay 4 sound Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of Parameter Value Description Delay Left 0 840 ms Adjusts the time delay from the note 1 direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay Right 0 840 ms Adjusts the time delay from the note 1 direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard Delay Center 0 840 ms Adjusts the time delay from the note 1 direct sound until when the cen ter delay sound is heard Feedback 98 498 Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above BYPASS which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feed back set this parameter to BY PASS Left Level 0 127 Adjusts the volume of the left delay sound Right Level 0 127 Adjusts the volume of the right delay sound Center Level 0 127 Adjusts the volum
244. te of each effect multi effect chorus reverb will 11 HEXA CHORUS p 72 be displayed 123 TREMOLO CHO p 72 13 SPACE D p 73 14 StCHORUS p 73 15 St FLANGER p 73 2 When the cursor is located at Rev press PAGE CURSOR 16 STEP FLANGER p 74 gt and the effect parameters will be displayed one after 17 St DELAY p 74 another starting with the multi effect MFX parameters 18 LONG DELAY p 75 MEMO 19 MOD DELAY p 75 By holding down SHIFT and using PAGE CURSOR a 20 3TAP DELAY p 76 gt you can jump between the four parameter groups effect 21 4TAP DELAY p 76 on off multi effect chorus and reverb 22 TM CTRL DLY p 77 Example for a patch 23 2V PCH SHIFT p 77 24 FB PCH SHIFT p 78 25 REVERB p 78 Example for a rhythm patch E GATED REV EBG p 79 27 OD gt CHORUS p 79 28 OD gt FLANGER p 79 29 OD gt DELAY p 80 Example for a performance 30 DIST gt CHORUS p 80 31 DIST gt FLANGER p 80 32 DIST gt DELAY p 80 33 ENH gt CHORUS p 81 MEMO 34 ENH 2FLANGER p 81 Depending on the type of effect that is selected what is 35 ENH gt DELAY p 81 displayed will be different 36 CHORUS gt DELAY p 82 3 Use PAGE CURSOR a to select the parameter that 37 FLGSDELAY p 82 you want to edit and use VALUE to modify the value 38 CHO gt FLANGER p 83 orthe parameter 39 CHORUS DELAY p 83 40 FLG DELAY p
245. th diee onset terae beni 47 EFEO Rate zen ua Pee 47 Local Control Local Controller 89 126 Lowert one 5 559 0 hese en bites 40 M MASTER EFFECT SWITCH 1 eere 65 Master Effects Switch sesssssssesee 35 58 Master Key Sft Master Key Shift en 89 Master Level E 89 Master T n s eec te Re amd dee 89 Maximum Polyphony nee 41 leet 41 MFX e EE 56 MEX Switch Patch Tone Parameters eee 46 Performance Part Effect sse 58 MTDE zu Ee EE EE 90 92 Mod Modulation Assign sese 89 Mode EE 42 Modify Dest Modify Destination en 46 Modulation Lever esee nennen 29 ModulationDst Modulation Destination 46 Motif Arpeggio Motif sess 62 Multi chord Memory sese 24 Multi effect send level to chorus 69 Multi effect send level to reverb 69 Multi Effects mesnine ee itae t e ee t esie een 35 Multi Effects Control 1 2 see 69 Multi Effects Parameters esee 68 Multi Effects Type sor eaea aean 68 N INafne eenaa teli tet te aaa SE 43 Pateh Rame sedeo hei ferio pere dares 45 Performance Name eere 56 Rhythm Set Name 2 ee 52 No Original Tone Number ue 46 INOte EH ee RATONES 92 Note EE 92 Numbers and numerals eee 43 O Octave Range Arpeggio Octave Range
246. the external MIDI device match the keyboard s Transmit channel and the Receive channel for each of the external MIDI sound generator s Parts Here we will explain the settings for using the RS 50 in Patch mode Ifyou are using the RS 50 in Performance mode the part and channel numbers will be the same unless you change the settings 1 Press SYSTEM so it is lit 2 Use PAGE CURSOR a to select Patch Tx Ch MEMD By holding down SHIFT and using PAGE CURSOR a gt you can quickly select the SYSTEM MIDI group p 88 3 Use VALUE to modify the value Value 1 16 Performance data from the RS 50 will be transmitted on the selected channel RxCH Performance data will be transmitted on the same channel as the Receive Channel p 57 of the part OFF Performance data will not be transmitted Normally you will use the RxCH setting 4 Press WRITE to save the settings For further information refer to How to make the system function settings p 88 Press EXIT to cancel the operation and return to the previous page With the above settings when the RS 50 s keyboard is played sounds are simultaneously played by the RS 50 and the external MIDI sound generator For instructions on setting the Receive channel for each of the Parts of the external MIDI sound generator refer to the owner s manual that came with the device If you want sounds to be played onl
247. the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Output MONO STE Specifies how the sound will be REO output With a setting of MONO the output sound will be monaural Level 0 127 Specifies the output volume from the Lo Fi effect Effects 83 43 SLICER By applying successive cuts to the sound this effect produces what are heard as backing phrases even though you ve played something much simpler This is especially effective when applied to sustain type sounds L out Parameter Value Description Timing Pattern 1 34 Selects a pattern to specify the timing at which the sound will be cut Accent Pattern 1 16 Specifies the location of the ac cents Accent Level 0 127 Adjusts the volume of the ac cents As this setting is increased the accent will be more pronounced Attack 0 127 Adjusts the attack time of an in put sound As this setting is increased the attack will become faster Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note 2 This sets the period for the pat tern Reset OFF ON Specifies whether the timing pattern at which the sound is cut will be reset ON or not OFF when you play a sound While the rhythm guide is play ing the period for the pattern is not reset even if you set this ON Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level
248. tic amp Electric Bass SBS SYNTH BASS Synth Bass RHYTHM DRM DRUMS Rhythm Set amp SFX Rh PRC PERCUSSION Percussion SFX SOUND FX Sound FX BTS BEAT amp GROOVE Beat and Groove CMB COMBINATION Other Patches Convenient functions for patch editing Patch Utility Patch Utility provides various functions that you will find convenient when editing patches such as copying or initializing a patch Copying patch parameters PATCH PRM COPY The settings of any patch can be copied to the currently selected patch By making good use of this function you can edit more efficiently The following five parameters can be copied e UPPER TONE Copy the settings of the upper tone LOWER TONE Copy the settings of the lower tone e MFX Copy the multi effect settings CHORUS e REVERB Copy the chorus settings Copy the reverb settings Copying the UPPER TONE or LOWER TONE 1 Press PATCH so it is lit and you are in Patch mode Select the copy destination patch 2 Press UTILITY 3 Use PAGE CURSOR a to select 1 PATCH PRM COPY Patch Mode 4 Press ENTER 5 Use VALUE to select UPPER TONE or LOWER TONE 6 Press PAGE CURSOR p Use VALUE to select the copy source patch 7 Press PAGE CURSOR p J Use VALUE to specify whether the data is to be copied to the upper tone or the lower tone
249. time A in the diagram below Delay Time 0 345 ms Adjusts time B in the diagram below Level original tone l A IL B IL B HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feed back set this parameter to BY PASS Feedback 98 98 96 Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Parameter Value Description Balance D100 0W D0 100W Adjusts the volume balance be tween the direct sound and the delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the delay sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 47 FBK RIPPER Feedback Ripper This effect repeatedly cuts the sound and outputs a delayed sound for the cut portion You can create new phrases by applying this to a drum phrase or other phrase Feedback Feedback Parameter Value Description Mod Wave TRI SOR SIN SAW1 2 TRI The sound will be cut by a triangle wave SOR The sound will be cut by a square wave SIN The sound will be cut by a sine wave SAW1 2 The sound will be cut by asawtooth wave The teeth in SAW1 and SAW2 point at op
250. tion Assign MODULATION PORTA TIME VOLUME BALANCE PAN EXPRESSION PORTAMENTO SOSTENUTO SOFT RESO NANCE RELEASE TIME ATTACK TIME CUTOFF DECAY TIME LFO RATE LFO DEPTH LFO DELAY CHO SEND LEV EL REV SEND LEVEL MFX PARAMETERI MFX PARAMETER2 AFTERTOUCH Pedal Pedal Control Assign Values for Modulation Assign TAP TEMPO CLC C1 C3 Knob Assign Values for Modulation Assign PATCH MODIFY MIDI group Patch Rx Ch Patch Receive Channel 1 16 Patch Tx Ch Patch Transmit Channel 1 16 RxCH OFF Perform Ctrl Ch Performance Control Channel 1 16 OFF Rx Prog Chg Receive Program Change Switch OFF ON Rx Bank Sel Receive Bank Select Switch OFF ON Rx Sys Exc Receive System Exclusive Switch OFF ON Tx Prog Chg Transmit Program Change Switch OFF ON Tx Bank Sel Transmit Bank Select Switch OFF ON Tx Edit Data Transmit Edit Data Switch OFF ON Tx Active Sens Transmit Active Sensing Switch OFF ON Device ID Device ID Number 17 32 Soft Thru Soft Through Switch OFF ON PATCH SCALE group Type Patch Scale Tune Type EQUAL JUST maj in C JUST min in C ARABIC Tune C Tune B Patch Scale Tune C B 64 63 108 Original tone list
251. tion channels match f using the RS 50 to sound an external MIDI sound generator check to make sure the channels being used for transmission by the keyboard are matched up with the channels used for reception by the relevant Parts on the external MIDI sound generator p 93 f using an external MIDI device to sound the RS 50 each Part s reception channel needs to be set so it matches the channels that will be used for transmission by the external MIDI device p 94 Are volume levels being lowered by pedal movements or by MIDI messages expression messages received from an external MIDI device Is the MIDI Rx Receive Switch of the corresponding part set to OFF If using the RS 50 with an external MIDI device turn it ON p 95 Could the Bank Select and Program Change messages transmitted by an external device have the wrong values If using the RS 50 with an external MIDI device make sure that the correct Bank Select and Program Change messages p 95 are transmitted Is the Clock Source set to MIDI If you set the clock source to MIDI some of the effects that are synchronized with the tempo will not work Set the clock source to INT except when you want to synchronize the RS 50 with an external MIDI device p 89 The pitch is off Could Transpose be on p 31 Are the Octave Shift settings correct p 30 Are the Scale Tune settings correct p 91 p 58 Are the Master Key Shift setting
252. to ON 1 Press SYSTEM so it is lit Performing with an external MIDI device 2 Use PAGE CURSOR a We to select Local Control MEM By holding down SHIFT and using PAGE CURSOR a gt you can quickly select the SYSTEM GENERAL group p 90 3 Use VALUE to set the parameter to OFF 4 Press WRITE to save the settings For further information refer to How to make the system function settings p 88 Press EXIT to cancel the operation and return to the previous page Regardless of the Local Control setting music data from an external MIDI device is always received and will play the internal sound generator Turning on the external sequencer s thru function Turn the sequencer s Thru function ON The sequencer takes the performance data received at the MIDI IN connector and outputs the data unchanged from the MIDI OUT connector refer to the previous section To determine whether or not your sequencer features a MIDI Thru function and for instructions on making the Thru function setting refer to the owner s manual for your sequencer If your sequencer does not have a Thru function set the RS 50 s Local Control to ON Setting the performance Before beginning to record first make the Performance settings select the Patches and Key mode make any multi effects chorus and reverb settings set the knobs and so on nore Also set the Receive
253. ts Switch The Master Effect Switch can also be set here For details refer to Turning the effect function on and off MASTER EFFECT SWITCH p 65 MFX Switch Switches the multi effect on bypass off in each Part Value BYPASS ON Chorus Send Lvl Chorus Send Level Sets the amount of chorus effect applied in each Part Value 0 127 Reverb Send Lvl Reverb Send Level Sets the amount of reverb effect applied in each Part Value 0 127 Playing more than one sound simultaneously Performance mode Saving a performance Use the following procedure to save a performance you ve edited 1 Press WRITE Use VALUE to specify the number U1 US8 at which the user performance is to be saved von Be aware that if you choose a number in which a user performance has already been saved the previously saved settings will be overwritten and lost 2 Press ENTER If you have edited patches for some parts the following message will appear If you have not edited any of the patches in the performance the user performance has been saved and the display will indicate COMPLETED 3 If you want to save the edited patch press ENTER The display will indicate the part where the edited patch is used Use VALUE to specify the number U001 U128 at which the user patch is to be saved If you decide not to save the user patch press EXIT not
254. two tones the upper tone and the lower tone Patch Modify applies p 40 The way that the tones are sounded Single Split Dual is saved in each adjustments relative to the patch and you can change this using KEY MODE p 44 settings of the original tone Depending on the tone you E Selecting the tone that you want to modify Sel duis magnet always DESTINATION TON E produce a noticeable Use the DESTINATION TONE button to specify whether you will modify the change in the sound upper or the lower tone NEM UPPER For a rhythm set Patch d Lower hoc Modity applies to the set as SUN DESTINATION DESTINATION a whole TONE TONE C as e UPPER lit Only the upper tone will be modified LOWER lit Only the lower tone will be modified Both lit Both the upper and lower tones will be modified MA E Adjusting the volume balance of the two tones You can use a knob to control the volume balance of the upper tone and lower tone PATCH MODIFY I lr SS QZ 1 Press the patch modify select button to make the BALANCE LFO indicator light 2 Turn the BALANCE knob MEMO You cannot change the Turning this to the right increases the volume of the upper tone while turning it to volume balance for rhythm the left increases that of the lower tone de 26 E Vibrato and Wah effects LFO 6
255. uencer By executing the Performance or Patch Utility XFER to MIDI command p 51 p 61 with DUMP ALL selected as the content to be transmitted What you can transmit all of the user area data patches performances system etc from the MIDI OUT connector By recording these messages on your external MIDI sequencer and saving them you can back up all of the RS 50 s data If you want to restore the backed up data into the RS 50 once again send the data to the RS 50 s MIDI IN Do not operate the RS 50 while this data is being received Using the RS 50 as a General MIDI General MIDI 2 system compatible sound module You can play back music data designed for General MIDI and General MIDI 2 sound generators by connecting an external sequencer and using the RS 50 as a sound module E For instructions on connecting the external sequencer refer to p 96 Playing back General MIDI General MIDI 2 music data Be sure to note the following when playing back General MIDI or General MIDI 2 music data Set the System Exclusive Receive Switch to ON p 90 When set to OFF GM System On and GM 2 System On MIDI messages cannot be received With the factory settings this will be ON Make sure to play back from the beginning of the song When playback of a song is started at any point other than the beginning the sound generator settings won t be reset to the default settings for General MIDI and General MIDI 2 so
256. und generator section of the RS 50 contains a filter that can cut or boost specific frequency regions of the sound Each original tone in the RS 50 has its own filter settings but you can use patch editing to modify these Cutoff Freq Cutoff Frequency Specifies the frequency cutoff frequency at which the filter will begin to modify the sound This is linked with the operation of the CUTOFF knob of the panel p 29 VALUE 64 63 47 Creating a patch Patch mode Resonance This boosts the region near the cutoff frequency to add a distinctive character to the sound Raising this value excessively may cause oscillation and distortion This is linked with the operation of the RESONANCE knob of the panel p 29 VALUE 64 63 e Adjusting the attack or decay of the sound Envelope Each original tone of the RS 50 includes envelope settings but you can use patch editing to apply relative adjustments to these settings Depending on the tone you select editing may not produce noticeable change in the sound You cannot change the sustain level Attack Time Adjusts the envelope attack time This is linked with the operation of the ATTACK knob of the panel p 28 VALUE 64 63 Decay Time Adjusts the envelope decay time This is linked with the operation of the DECAY knob of the panel p 28 VALUE 64 63 Release Time Adjusts the envelope release time This is linked with the operation of the RELEASE
257. und modules MIDI messages used by the RS 50 MIDI uses various types of messages to transmit a wide variety of information MIDI messages are broadly divided into two different categories those handled through individual MIDI channels Channel messages and messages that are not related to separate channels System messages The RS 50 mainly uses the following MIDI messages Channel messages These are messages used for conveying what is happening in a performance These comprise the bulk of MIDI messages Note On This message is sent when a key is pressed A Note on message contains the following three types of information Note on A key has been played Note number Which key was played Velocity The amount of force velocity used when the key was played The Note Numbers fall within the range of 0 127 with middle C C4 as number 60 Note name C 14 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 GI 0 36 48 gt 60 72 gt 84 127 Note number Note Off This message is sent when a key is released When a Note off message is received the relevant note will be turned off A Note off message contains the following three types of information Note off Note number Which key was released A key was released Velocity The force velocity used during release of the key 92 Performing with an external MIDI device Pitch Bend Change This message transmits whatever motion is made by the
258. unlight Please be aware of this when using the D Beam controller outside E Effects that can be used with the D Beam controller SOLO SYNTH This lets you generate passages that sound as if you are playing the keyboard rapidly For example if you hold down the four notes C D E and G with your right hand and move your left hand over the D Beam a phrase such as CDEGCDEG will be repeated For example you can use the D Beam to play a synth solo on a synth lead type sound and hold chords using a long sustaining sound to create the impression of harp playing The chord memory function also provides a chord set that contain notes of a specific scale and is designed for use with this function 16 Scale Set ACTIVE EXPRESS Active Expression You can use the D Beam as an Active Expression function If you assign the Active Expression function to a patch that consists of dual tones a patch whose KEYMODE is set to DUAL you can create tonal changes for greater expressiveness and to emphasize the forte passages in your playing The patches suitable for active expression have AEx in their names NEM The explanations of each type in this manual are for when the D Beam Polarity is set to NORMAL p 34 Note With SOLO SYNTH switched on pressing the keyboard alone will not result in the production of sound You need to move your hand over the D Beam while you hold down keys ve If the Active Expres
259. usts the volume balance be tween the direct sound and the delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the delay sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 18 LONG DELAY This is useful when you want to apply a delay that is longer than 17 St DELAY Lin O C L out Balance D 7 Uu D Feedback Rin O R out Balance D Parameter Value Description Delay 0 840 ms note Adjusts the time from the direct 1 sound until the delay sound is heard Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase HF Damp 200 8000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above BYPASS which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feed back set this parameter to BY PASS Low Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the low fre quency High Gain 15 15 dB Adjusts the gain of the high fre quency Balance D100 0W Adjusts the volume balance be D0 100W tween the direct sound and the delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the delay sound will be output Level 0 127 Adjusts the output level 19 MOD DELAY Modulation Delay This effect adds modulation t
260. ve the system function press EXIT Selecting system setting parameters GENERAL CURSOR gt CURSOR Tal E SHIFT SHIFT PAGE PAGE CURSOR gt CURSOR lt 4 PAGE PAGE CURSOR gt CURSOR lt 4 CONTROLLER el PAGE JL PAGE SHIFT CURSOR pm CURSOR lt SHIFT 13 ir PAGE PAGE CURSOR P PAGE PAGE CURSOR lt 4 CURSOR pm CURSOR lt MIDI v EZ PAGE p PATCH SCALE EY PAGE SHIFT CURSOR gt CURSOR lt SHIFT HE PAGE PAGE CURSOR gt PAGE PAGE CURSOR lt 4 CURSOR Pp CURSOR lt yi PAGE CURSOR gt PAGE CURSOR lt Settings common to all modes System Function Functions of the system parameters System parameter functions are explained here according to the group in which they are found Settings common to the entire system GENERAL LCD Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the display VALUE 1 10 MEM The LCD CONTRAST setting is saved automatically and is retained even while the power is off Master Tune Adjusts the overall tuning of the RS 50 The display shows the frequency of the A4 note center A VALUE 415 3 466 2 Hz Master Key Sft Master Key Shift Shifts the overall pitch of the RS 50 in semitone steps VALUE 24 24 Master Level Adjusts the volume of the entire
261. ver you can view the programs of different stations This is because the television set has thus been directed to selectively display only the information being transmitted by a particular station In the same way MIDI also allows a device to select the information intended for that device out of the variety of information that is being transmitted to it The cable from the antenna carries the TV signals from many broadcast stations Station A Station B A Station C The TV is set to the channel of the station you wish to watch MIDI uses sixteen channels numbered 1 16 Normally receiving devices should be set so they receive only the channels they need to receive Example Set the RS 50 to send on Channel 1 and Channel 2 then set sound module A to receive only Channel 1 and sound module B to receive only Channel 2 With this setup you can get an ensemble performance with for example a guitar sound from sound module A and bass from sound module B MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI THRU Transmit channel 1 2 SE Receive channel 1 ound e SC E Module Je BB iin A MIDI keyboard Sound Receive channel 2 Module E eo tm ad When used as a sound module the RS 50 can receive on up to sixteen MIDI channels Sound modules like the RS 50 which can receive multiple MIDI channels simultaneously and play different sounds on each channel are called multitimbral so
262. will produce sound and moving the pitch bend lever will control the pitch When Local Control is off playing the keyboard will not produce sound and moving the pitch bend lever will not control pitch The sound generator of the RS 50 will produce sound only in response to messages received from an external MIDI device Sequencer pao All performance data Set Thru that arrives at MIDI IN Function to On will be output from MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN Sound Generating O Section Set Local Control to Off While at this setting the RS 50 s keyboard and controllers are disconnected from the sound generating section so they will not directly control it Keyboard Controller Section RS 50 The performance data from the RS 50 s keyboard controller section is output from the MIDI OUT connector and recorded by the sequencer This performance data is then also output back to the RS 50 from the sequencer s MIDI OUT connector and played by the RS 50 s sound generator If Local Control were ON each note would be played twice once by the music data from the keyboard controller section and once again by the data sent from the sequencer In order to prevent such double triggering the Local Control setting is turned off to separate the keyboard controller section from the sound generating section If your sequencer does not have a Thru function set the RS 50 s Local Control
263. y a tone by itself The patch is the unit of sound that can be played and the tones are the basic building blocks that make up the patch Patch Patches On the RS 50 the sounds you use for normal playing e g from the keyboard are called patches A patch is analogous to an instrument held by a member of an orchestra Each patch consists of two tones an upper tone and lower tone You can assign the two tones to their own region of the keyboard or play them together to produce a richer sound p 44 Detailed settings can be made independently for each of the two tones p 46 Rhythm sets Rhythm sets are groups consisting of various percussion instrument sounds Since percussion instruments generally do not play melodies there is no need for a percussion instrument sound to be able to play a scale on the keyboard It is however more important that as many percussion instruments as possible be available to you at the same time Therefore each key note number of a rhythm set will produce a different percussion instrument Performance A performance is a set of sounds containing patches for the sixteen parts used when you use the Rhythm Guide or when using the RS 50 with an external MIDI device Part A part corresponds to a single musician in a band or orchestra Since the RS 50 has sixteen parts you can use sixteen different patches or rhythm sets to play as many as sixteen perform
264. y by the external MIDI sound generator set Local control to OFF p 96 yon When you select a patch or rhythm set on the RS 50 a bank number and program number will be transmitted to the external MIDI sound module as described in the Bank number program number correspondence table p 95 This will switch sounds on the external MIDI sound module but if the external MIDI sound module receives a bank number for which it provides no sounds it may choose a substitute sound or may produce no sound at all In order to select a sound reliably you may wish to first select the sound group on your external MIDI sound module and then transmit only a program number This will allow you to switch sounds within the same group If you want to transmit only the program number turn Tx Bank Sel Transmit Bank Select Switch p 90 off Playing the RS 50 s sound generator from an external MIDI device Next try playing the RS 50 from an external MIDI device Connecting an external MIDI device B MIDI OUT H 1 Before starting the connection procedure make sure that the power to all devices has been turned off RS 50 2 After reading Connecting the RS 50 to external equipment p 14 connect an audio device system or headphones 3 Connect the external MIDI sound device with t
265. your own on the RS 50 you will start with one of the existing patches preset patches and edit it to create the desired sound A sound you create can be saved as one of 128 user patches MEMD Each item that can be set is known as a parameter When you change the values of parameters you are doing what is referred to as Editing MEM Settings for the internal effects reverb chorus multi effect are also saved as part of the patch settings For details on editing the effect settings refer to Adding effects p 65 This chapter explains the procedures used in creating patches and the functions of the patch parameters MEMD If you want to edit the sound of a rhythm set refer to Creating a rhythm set Patch mode p 52 Three tips for editing patches Select a patch that is similar to the sound you wish to create p 20 It s hard to create a new sound that s exactly what you want if you just select a patch and modify its parameters at random It makes sense to start with a patch whose sound is related to what you have in mind Choose the tone that you want to edit p 26 You can assign a different instrumental sound to each of the two tones upper lower in a patch and edit them independently Use DESTINATION TONE to choose the tone to be edited UPPER only LOWER only or both MEMO If the KEY MODE is SINGLE the upper tone will always sound If you want to hear only the lower tone while you edi

Roland RS-50 Musical Instrument User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents